Transcripts
1. Master English Grammar: Hello, I'm Francis from
last minute English, and this is master
English grammar. Let me tell you a little
bit about this course. Let me answer two questions. The first one, who
is this course for? The second one, what will
we learn in this course? So the first question, who is this course for? So this is a course for people who have studied English before. Now maybe that was a long time ago and you've
forgotten a little, or maybe you've studied recently or you're still studying now. But you've never been totally confident
about your grandma. There are still some grammar
questions Where you think, Is that the right thing to say or is that the right thing? You're not totally confident
about your grandma, but you would like to improve and get perfect
English grammar. Now you might be studying
for an English exam like IELTS or TOEFL or
PTE or something else. You might be working in English, or maybe you hope
to work in English. You might be working or studying abroad or perhaps studying
in your home country, but in English and
English course. Or maybe you just want to improve your skills and
learn something new. It's suitable for everyone. The important thing is that
you need to be motivated and you need to want to have
perfect English grammar. That's what this
course is all about. Something important
is that this is not a course that's
suitable for beginners. So if you've only just
started studying English, then this is not
the right course. You should have about
B1 level English. And then this will be a great
course to take your grandma from an intermediate level
up to a very high level. And the second question, what will we learn? So the first thing we're going
to do in this course is do a review of basic
English grammar. So if you haven't studied
English for awhile, for maybe several years and you've forgotten
a little bit, then it would be a good idea
to take that review part. And we'll talk about things
like verbs and nouns, adjectives, all of
the basic things that you need to know. Then we'll move to a
three-step process. The first step will
be to understand. So I'll give you a
lot of information, lots of really detailed
sentences that you can follow, some examples, lots
of vocabulary. And your job will be to study that and to
understand them. Then the next step, practice, we're going to practice
in every video, those things that
we're learning. And through practice
and through me giving you answers and
explaining those answers. We'll get to step
three, competence. You'll feel like you have
perfect English grammar. And all of your worries in
the past will be in the past because you'll have
very high confidence in any situation, exams, work environment,
or anything else to be able to use your
perfect English grammar. As with all courses in Udemy, you get a 30-day
money-back guarantee. So if you're not happy,
there's no risk. So if you want to
master English grammar, if you want to take
your grandma to the next level,
Let's get started.
2. Welcome: Hello and welcome to the course. Thank you very much for
deciding to take this course. I'm sure that you're going
to find it very useful. Let me quickly tell you about what we're
gonna be studying. So there's mostly, has mainly
two parts to this course. The first one is
a Review section. And in that Review section, we're going to look at some of the more basic beginner grammar, things like verbs and
nouns and adjectives. Just to make sure that if you haven't studied
English for awhile, you're completely fresh with
all of that information. That's the review section. Then we'll move on
to the new stuff, the more complicated things. And we'll be looking at a
lot of different areas. We'll look at a lot of Verbs, patterns including modal Verbs. We'll look at the more
complicated Tenses, like the past perfect
continuous tense, the future perfect simple tense. Some of those ones
that we're not quite sure how to
use at this point. And we'll learn some
great ways for talking about really
complicated ideas like, how do you talk about a
regret from your past, something that you
wish you'd made a different decision back then. Or if you're giving can a
hypothetical situations. Two people, if you're saying, what would you do if you had $1 million or
if you could fly? What would you do? These quite difficult
grammar situations? We're gonna be taking a
look at all of those. And remember, the goal in the end is to build
your confidence through practice to make sure that in the end you have perfect
English grammar. So let me just say
one more time. Welcome to the course. Thank you for deciding
to take the course. I really hope and I'm sure that you'll
find it very useful. And I'll be waiting for you in the next video.
See you there.
3. Nouns Review: Let's do a review of nouns, one of the most important
type of words in English. So first of all, let's talk about the gender
of nouns. In English. Nouns don't really have
genders most of the time. In many other languages, e.g. in Spanish and French, they do have agenda. The noun can be
masculine or feminine. In English, we don't
really do that. Of course, living people
and things have agenda, but the nouns themselves,
the words don't. In most cases, there are some exceptions when
we would say sheep. So e.g. you might talk about a ship or a car or something
like that as a sheet. And sometimes we talk about countries or the
Earth as a sheet. But almost all the time,
there's no gender. We can take a look
at some examples. First of all, for ships, you could say she's going down, abandon ship, or she'll
handle these rough swells. That's like a lot of waves
and stay the course. So they're talking
about the ship as a sheep, trains or engines. After weeks of maintenance
and refitting the engine, she's running like a dream. So that's the, the train or the car or something like that. Then finally, countries we
talk about Mother Earth, Mother Nature, Mother Russia. The British Empire is sometimes
referred to as sheep. We said the British
Empire and her colonies. So there are a few situations
when they do have agenda, but most of the time they don't. Next, let's take a
look at noun types. So there are several different
types of nouns in English. And we have a table here, which looks a bit
scary at first. And it has most of the different
types and some examples. You don't really need to remember the names
of these types of nouns unless you're taking a grammar test or if you want to become an English teacher. But it's good to
have that idea of the different types of nouns just to help your
grammar in general. So first of all, we
have common nouns. Those are things like just
ordinary, everyday things. A table, library, car phone, pasta, university, things
like that, normal things. Then we have proper nouns and we can basically
think about that as name's James or
the country Italy. The company Huawei, the Amazon, the Amazon rain forest, deserts, mountains, things like that, have a name and those
ones are capitalized. We use a capital
letter for those ones. Then we have abstract nouns. That's things like happiness,
love, sadness, despair, feelings and things that we
can't really touch or see, but we still know
that they exist. We call those ones
abstract nouns. Then the fourth type
is collective nouns, and that's when we have a
group of things together. So you could say a crowd of
people or a flock of birds. Have Congregation, committee heard many
other ones as well? E.g. let me give you
a little question. Do you know what the word
is for a group of owls? A group of owls is called
a parliament of owls. Parliament as the
collective noun. And what about crows? A group of crows is
called a murder of crows. Collective nouns are very fun. There was an interesting words. The next one is compound nouns. So those are two nouns
that are put together. Bus stop, train station, brother-in-law,
keyboard, football. When we put things together, those are called compound nouns. And finally, ones that you
probably know very well. Pronouns, he, she, it, we, they, them and others, words like that, those
are called pronouns. Now something
important to review is the spelling rules
for plural nouns. Plural is when it's
more than one. Alright? And most of the time we can just add an S to make
the plural version. And we can see some
easy examples. Table is one table
or two tables. Dr is doctors, crowd
becomes crowds. Train station is train stations, and committee is committees. So most of the time we
just add the s. But of course there are some exceptions are differences to that rule. So e.g. if the word
ends in S or X, Z, CH, or SSH, we're
going to add the E, S rather than S. So let's take a look at
some common examples there. Cross becomes crosses. Boxes, boxes with
ES, watch, watches, quiz becomes quizzes,
and bus becomes buses. So be careful of that spelling. And another common exception to that rule is when
the noun ends in y. And then we're going
to delete the way, get rid of it and add i, c, s. So let's take a look
at some examples. Story with a y becomes
stories, IES, baby, babies. Barry, Barry's company becomes companies and party
becomes parties. So all of those, it's
a noun ending in y. Delete the y, put S
to make it plural. And if the noun ends in 0, then we have two rules. So let's take a look. If the last sound
of that noun is a vowel sound like 0 or
something like that. Then we're going
to add just an S. But if the last sound
has a consonant as well, so that's all of the
other letters like d or t or S. All of the letters
that are not vowels. If there's a consonant
sound included, we add ES. So this is better if we
look at some examples, otherwise it's a
little confusing. So the first one, radio, radio, the 0 sound is by itself. So it's radios with
an S, Alright, but all of the other
ones you can see potato and torpedo
here, row and mosquito. All of those have
the consonant sound included in that last sound. It's TO DO row and toe again. So we add the S, Alright, So that one's a
little confusing, That's a slightly
harder spelling rule. Make sure you think
carefully about that one. Now so far, all of
the ones we've looked at follows some kind of rule. But there are also some irregular plural
spellings in English. Those are ones where they
just make up their own rule. They do whatever they want. So let's take a look. The first one, man,
if it's two of them, it becomes men and
woman becomes women. Now, it's not woman, it's women. It's a very strange
pronunciation that one, even the pronunciation changes. We can also see that happen
in the last example. Child becomes children. So the, i sound a
child changes into it. Children. Alright, so those are
changing the spelling. There are also changing
their pronunciation. And Chairman becomes Chairman. Chairperson becomes chat people, and of course person
becomes people as well. So those irregular ones, you really have to be a little
bit careful about them, pay close attention
to them as well. And some nouns don't
change at all, regardless of It's one of them, or ten, or 100 or 1 million. So let's take a
look at those ones. So we have fish, always stays as fish. It could be 1 million fish, but it's still
fish, sheep, sheep. Species is species,
vocabulary is vocabulary, and aircraft would be aircraft. Those are just five examples. There are many examples, but be careful because sometimes a common grammar mistake I see is when people
say things like, I have learned many vocabularies or there are 1,000
ships outside my house. So make sure you make a
note when you're studying about which nouns don't
change when it's plural. And let's think about
the grammar now of countable and uncountable nouns. So remember, countable nouns are the ones
where you can say, okay, there's one of that thing
and there's 123 e.g. a. Dog, you can say, okay, there is one dog. Oh, look, there are two dogs. Uncountable nouns are
things when it's hard to count them, e.g. water. Can you say it? Look, there is one water
or there's so much water. It's hard to count. Things like water,
things like meat, at things like rice. These things are hard to count, so we call them
uncountable nouns. And we have some rules
for the grammar of that. If it's a countable noun, we can use a or an, or a specific amount like five or ten or 1 million when
we're talking about them. And if it's uncountable, we can use the word sum, but we can also use some for
countable nouns as well. So sum is a pretty useful
one if you're not sure, is this word countable
or uncountable? Let's take a look
at some examples. The first two we'll
see are going to be countable and then the last
three are uncountable. Report you could say a
report or two reports. We're adding the S egg. Of course we can count
there is one egg. And we say an egg because
the e is a vowel, so it an egg or six eggs. Milk is uncountable. How do you say look, one milk? How much is one
milk? We don't know. So we would say
some milk, pasta, some pasta and inflammation
is a very common mistake. People say, I need
some informations, but that one is uncountable. So it's information,
some information. Now sometimes when
we're writing, we need to change an uncountable noun and put it as a countable
noun. In some way. We can't just say, add the S and say, hey, it's countable now,
Two informations, or let me have five milks. That doesn't make sense. So what we can do is to add
a word before and we say a, something of the
uncountable noun. So we can see some
examples of that now. First of all, milk, you could say two liters of milk or three glasses of milk. So really we're counting the liters and we're
counting the glasses, not the milk itself. Pasta, 200 g of pasta, three boxes of pasta. Information, you could say
to reports of information, two pieces of
information, water, 1,000 bottles of
water and vocabulary, two sections of vocabulary. Or again, you could say
two pieces of vocabulary, and that would mean two words. So if you want to say, I
learned to new words today, and you want to do
it in a fancy way. You could say, I learned two
pieces of vocabulary today. And everyone will
think, Oh, wow, this guy is really good. Now let's do a quick
review of using the word some and
any and R and is. So this is an important
little detail of grammar that many
people make mistakes on. So let's, let's
take a quick look. So when we using any that's used in
sentences and questions, when it's the negative form. So we're saying
the feeling of no. Alright, we'll see
some examples shortly. When we're talking
about countable nouns, when there's more than one. We say, if it's uncountable
nouns we're going to use is. So those are the rules. Let's see some examples
so it's a bit more clear. So you would say there
are some brownies. Brownies. If you don't know
what brownies are, you need to check because
they're delicious. But we can count brownies. There's one brownie,
there's five brownies. I ate ten brownies yesterday. We say there are some brownies, but I ate ten brownies
yesterday. Today. There aren't any brownies, alright, so we don't say
there aren't some brownies. We say there aren't
any brownies. And if we're asking
a question, we say, are there any brownies? No, there aren't because I
ate ten of them yesterday. Okay. And then for uncountable, there is some
information, alright, so we're using some and is, even though it's more than one, there could be a lot, many
pieces of information. We say that is some information. Or if we don't have
any information, we say there isn't
any information. And if we're asking
the question, again, we're going to use any, is there any information? And finally, let's take
a look at using much and many because this is
another very common mistake. So we use many when
we're talking about countable nouns and much
when it's uncountable nouns. Alright, so that's the
important rule to remember. When we're using much for
those uncountable nouns, our verb should be
in the singular. So e.g. if we're deciding
between is an R, R is more than one. It's plural, whereas is, is gonna be singular. So we'd use is, we'll see an
example in just a second. First of all, countable nouns. How many eggs are left? Eggs are countable, so we say many that aren't many eggs left. So if we said that aren't many, that means there might
be one or two eggs. If we say there aren't
any, that means zero. Are there many eggs left? So it's many when we're talking about countable
and uncountable. Much, how much soup is left? And there isn't much soup left, only a little bit of soup. And is there much soup left? Alright, so you can
see we're using, is, we're using the singular verb. So that is a quick
review of some of the more basic
rules about nouns. I hope this was useful
and I will be waiting for you in the next video
with another review. See you then.
4. Pronouns Review: So we've talked about
nouns already and in this video we're
going to focus on one of those types of nouns. We looked at it quickly
in the noun review, but this one is pronouns. So let's take a deeper look at pronouns because they
can be a little bit complicated when we're
understanding them in the grammar sense from
a grammatical perspective, if you want to sound fancy, set, what are pronouns? First of all, so pronouns
are used to replace the subject or the object in a sentence to avoid repetition, avoid saying the
same thing again, or to show possession. Possession is when
you own something, when you have something, pronouns can change depending on how many nouns they
are replacing. So if they're replacing one, it'll be different if they're replacing two or three or ten. And remember that? Of course, as we talked
about in the last video, nouns don't usually have agenda, but pronouns do have agenda. Alright, so it's based on
whether that thing or person or animal is biologically
male or female or neither. And of course, in
some languages, pronouns can be
formal, Like e.g. in Spanish, you say instead, and that's more formal
than saying too. But in English we
don't have that. So don't worry about
if in your language, some pronouns are more formal
than others in English, we don't have that. Instead, you show
like formality, you show respect to someone with the other words that you
choose and your tone of voice. And maybe the topics that
you're talking about, but not with the pronouns. In case you saw those words, objects and subjects
and thought, Oh my God, what are they? Let's quickly do a review. So the object is the thing
that receives the action. The action happens
to the object, and the subject does the action, or more technically,
performs the action. First of all, let's look at what I think are the easy ones, which are the subject pronouns. So when someone is
doing the action, and these are the ones that
I'm sure you remember. First-person is I. And then if it's
several, it's we. Second person is you just
one person or all of you? We still just say u. And then
the third person, he, she, or it, if it's several, we say V. And that's pretty
easy, you know that, right? Let's take a look at
some examples quickly. I'll I will be going
overseas next week. We'll be going
overseas next week. Sounds like fun. Where are the three
of you going? So that's you in the plural. Have you finished your homework? You work so well together. You're definitely the best
performing team this year. They are always late
on Monday mornings. Who who would want to be on
time on a Monday morning? He or she said, We can leave early for
on Friday this week. It will help a lot because we'll skip the rush hour traffic. So those were the subject
pronouns are pretty easy ones. One that gets a little bit more complicated is the difference between possessive
pronouns and determiners. So those are two
very fancy words and you might be thinking, I don't remember learning those. But of course, really the reality is that they're pretty simple. You
already know them. So let's take a look. So the possessive
determiners are my, your, his, her, our, their. And the possessive pronouns
are mine, yours, his hers. It's ours. And there's really, this
depends on where you put it, the way that you
organize your sentence. Let's see some examples. First of all, this
is my new car. This car is mine. Alright, so the blue is
the possessive determiner. When we organize the
sentence in that way, we said this is my car. Or if we change the order, we say this car, the car is mine. So usually the
possessive pronoun comes later in the sentence. And let's see some
other examples as well. Here's their daughter. Her name is Clara. These are my snacks. Yours are in the kitchen. Alright. You could also say your snacks. Then it would change, then it would be a
possessive determiner. But if we want to
make it even simpler, would say yours or
in the kitchen, because we already know
we're talking about snacks. And I managed to bring our laundry in before
the rain started, but there's got soaking wet, unfortunately, bad
news for them. The next thing to look
at is apostrophes. So those are the little
that we see, uh, when we're showing the
possession of something. So there are a few rules
that we have to remember. And the easiest way is just to look at some correct examples. So let's see the first one. So if we're talking about
the ball of the dog, this is the simplest way
of using apostrophes. We say that dogs, bull, dog, apostrophe S ball. That one's pretty easy. But in some situations it can get a little
more complicated. So e.g. if we want to
say this is Santiago, the son of Maria, that of we're going to
change into the apostrophe. We've got two ways to say
this is Maria's son Santiago, or this is Santiago
comma, Maria's sun. And both of those
ones are correct. Two different options. We're putting the
apostrophe after Maria because she is the
one who has the sun. Santiago doesn't have.
Well, maybe he does, we don't know, but Maria
has a son who is Santiago? Now, this one is a
bit more complicated. This one is the car
of Michael and Sam. So the car has two owners. Owner number one Michael, owner number to Sam. So it's Michael and Sam's car or you could say Sam
and Michael's car. Either order is fine. But the important
thing is that we don't say Michaels and SEMS car. We say Michael and Sam's car. So the apostrophe goes
on the second name. Then the phone of
Jess is Jess's phone. We say that one as Jess's phone. But what you'll notice
is that there's no S after the
apostrophe. Why not? Because that name ends in an S. Another example of
that is my name Francis, the last letters C, s. So if you want to say, I'm watching Francis's course, it would be CIS apostrophe. And then cause no extra S. Then the toys of the babies. The babies toys again
because its babies, it's more than one baby. So we don't need to
add that extra S. Now there are some
common mistakes that people make with pronouns. So we're gonna do
a little quiz now. Let me give you some sentences. I'm gonna give you two
versions of the sentences. One correct and one
with a common mistake. I want you to pause
the video and look and think about those
questions and think, which one is the
correct version. Alright, let's take a look. So we have two versions of
I was born in the nineties. Which one is right? The second my cat loves
playing with its ball of wool. It's a long drive from here. I live at home with my
parents and their dog. Snowy. Snowy Is my parents dog. So pause the video and
choose the correct ones and see if you can find exactly what the mistake is in
the incorrect ones. Pause the video, have a try now. Alright, so hopefully
you paused and had a try if you
didn't do it now. But let's take a look
at those answers. So the first one, I was born in the nineties. So when we're talking
about the decade, like the 80s and 90s, 2000s, we don't add an
apostrophe, no apostrophe needed. Then my cat loves playing with, it's a ball of wool. So when it's the possessive, when a thing like a cat
or a dog owns some thing, the dogs bull the
cats ball of wool. And we want to use it. It's no apostrophe because IT, apostrophe S is short for it is. Alright. So that's a very confusing one. Even native speakers have
trouble with that one. But remember, if
it's the possessive, Then there's no apostrophe. But we can take a
look at the next one, which is the opposite rule. So it's apostrophe S, a long drive from here. Why? Because it is a long
drive from here. Alright, so you
remember if it's the, it is, it's apostrophe. And the last one, I
live at home with my parents and their dog. So we know it's more
than one parent. It's their dog. Snowy. Snowy Is my parents dog. So it's parents more than
one parent, mum and dad. And then it's
apostrophe after that. Alright, because we're not
going to add that extra S, just like Francis's
course and Jess's class. We're not going to add the
extra S after pair roots. So the second one is correct. Now let's take a look
at object pronouns. So what are they? Those are pronouns that replace
the object in a sentence. Remember that object is
what receives the action. Subject does the action. Object receives the action. And it might seem
a bit complicated, but you'll, you'll definitely already be using these ones. Let me show you what they are. So if the subject is i than the object pronoun is
meat, we becomes ous. Us still use heat is him. She is her. It is, it is them. You I'm sure you already
know all of those words. Nothing new there I expect. But it's always good to look at some examples for a review. So Lord of the Rings
is my favorite book. I love to reread it
every now and then. So it is, the book is receiving
the action as the object. But we still say, it might knew English professor is
hilarious, very funny. I can't wait for
you to meet him. Alright, to meet him. So the English professor will
be receiving the action. So they are the object pronoun. Oh, did I tell you
I got a new puppy? My mother got her for
me on my birthday. She's a Labrador,
that's a type of dog. And she's very cute. You'll meet her this afternoon. And this is the marketing team. Everyone, please say hello. You'll be working with them
for the rest of the year. Or we could switch it
around and say they will be working with you
for the rest of the year. So if the marketing team
becomes the subject, then we use vague. But right now, the marketing
team is the object. So we use the object pronoun. Then. Now we can
do another quiz. And in this quiz I want you
to find all of the subject, object and possessive pronouns. So let's take a look
at some sentences. The receptionist will take
you to the dentist, true. Please follow her down the hall. I gave my daughter
a new bicycle. She's wanted it
for a whole year. Were really disappointed. The two of you can't
make it to our wedding. Lot of pronouns that I'd like to welcome you all to the
first day of the course. We're so excited
that she will be joining us on our trip overseas. And you can see that the
whole is already in green. And that's because we
can use all with you all to show that we're talking
to more than one person. So what I want you to do is to find all of
those subjects, objects, and
possessive pronouns. Alright, pause the
video, take your time. Have a try now. So let's take a look
at some answers. So first of all, the
receptionist will take you to the dentist room. Please follow her down the hall. Alright. So both of
those are the object. Next one, I gave my daughter. So that's the possessive. I have a daughter
and new bicycle. She has wanted it
for a whole year. So she does the wanting. She is the subject and object
is receiving the wants. So that's it. We're really disappointed. So we're as the subject, the two of you, the object can't make
it to our wedding. That's the possessive. The object, I would like
to welcome you all. So I is the subject doing the welcoming,
doing the action. You are receiving the Welcome. We're so excited that she will be joining us on
our trip overseas. So this one's a bit complicated. The sheet is a subject because she is doing the
action of joining us. And remember, of course, if it was an object, it would be her. So we don't say We're so excited that her will be joining us. We say we're so excited that
she will be joining us. And then the last type of
pronoun that we need to talk about is a reflexive pronoun. What are they? They are pronouns that
show that in the sentence, the subject doing the action and the object receiving
the action of the same. They're the same thing
or the same person. So how do we form them? Meet, becomes myself, you
is yourself or yourselves. Her is herself, him himself. It itself is ourselves, ourselves, and them
is themselves. Alright, so we can take
a look at some examples. I nearly burned myself
while lighting the fire. So I am the subject. I'm doing the lighting, but I almost become the object as well because I almost
sat myself on fire. He introduced himself
as the team leads, so he's probably the most experienced person in the group. The projects was intense
and we're proud of ourselves for getting it done. The students are learning to code during the
university vacation. They're teaching themselves. Be careful if you open
the trunk of the car, the door tends to close on
itself without warning, and then it's too late now
to ask for anyone for help. I'll do it myself. That's a very common
reflexive pronoun. And the meal itself
wasn't very tasty, but the venue is stunning. Stunning means really
amazing looking like, Oh, wow, what an amazing place. Okay, so that is a
review of pronouns. Of course, if there's anything
you didn't understand, you can always
send me a message. You can watch this video again, and I'll be waiting for you with another review in the next
video. See you there.
5. Adjectives Review: Welcome back. In this video, we're going
to review adjectives. So let's jump right in. So what are adjectives? Adjectives are the words
we use to describe nouns, not describing verbs or other adjectives will
see those later. These ones are describing nouns, things, and an important thing, an important rule to remember. In other languages,
adjectives will change, maybe add an s if it's in
the plural form of the noun. So if you have two
dogs and they are big, you might say there
are two bigs dogs. But in English, we
don't have that. The adjective always
stays the same. We would say there
are two big dogs. Okay, so remember the
adjective doesn't change. Some examples. My boss is a very busy person, so the noun is person, and the adjective is busy. The view from the second
story is spectacular. So the adjective is spectacular and he's like, Wow, amazing. The noun is which one? What do you think?
The noun here is? View. And that's an important thing. We should always focus
when we're writing about which noun our adjective
is talking about. And later we'll
see which verb or other adjective our
adverb is talking about. Because sometimes
they're together, like busy person is easy, but sometimes they're at the other end of the sentence
like view and spectacular. She is rubber, hungry. Hungry is the adjective. And the noun is
actually a pronoun. She. Lets take a look
at some of the types of adjectives that we
can see an English. So they're used to show the characteristics or the
properties of that noun. And those can be
many different types of characteristics
or properties. So it could be the color red,
orange, yellow, turquoise. Good word, size. It could be big
or small or huge. Are enormous, tiny. How do you say that
last word there? It means very, very small. But what's the pronunciation? It would be minute. It looks just like
the word minute, but actually we
pronounce it as minute. So it can be size, material made of steel. It could be wooden, leather. Age could be old or new or
ancient or modern shape, square, circular, spherical,
round, or nationality. It could be German,
Japanese, American, British. There are many different
types of adjectives. Now, a common mistake
that people make with the adjectives is related
to adjectives with I-N-G, E-D at the end. So some adjectives can
have the I-N-G and the ED. And both of them are
adjectives, e.g. boring and bored,
boring and board. That both adjectives, but we use them in different
situations. So this is something that
many people get wrong. My general rule for
remembering this is that the ED is how the person feels and the I-N-G is the thing that is affecting
how that person feels. So we can see that
was an amazing movie. The movie is affecting
how we feel. So we say amazing movie. I was amazed. My feeling is amazed by
all the special effects. Alright, so that's a
pretty good example of when the ING is going
to be affecting us. And the ED is how we feel. We went on a relaxing vacation
to New Yorker last week. We both came home
feeling very relaxed. Alright, so the
vacation was relaxing. It made us feel relaxed. And how do we feel relaxed? Very relaxed. I found this explanation
a bit confusing. So the explanation
is affecting us. So it is confusing. That explanation left
me a bit confused. That was my feeling
and I was a bit confused by that
explanation. Okay. So hopefully you're not
confused by this explanation. And you can remember that the ING is going to
be talking about how something is and how it affects us and the
ED, how we feel. Next, let's move
on to talk about comparative adjectives.
So what are they? That's when we're comparing
two different things. And we're talking
about how maybe the same they are or how different
those two things are. These ones can have ER, or i e at the end. Or we can put more or less. Before the adjective. So generally the
rule is that if it's a short adjective of two
syllables or one syllable, we're going to make
it into ER or IEEE. And we don't use more or less, if it's something longer, a longer word we're going
to use more or less. That's the general
rule to remember. And we use then
after the adjective. See some examples. So fast is a short
word, becomes faster. Early, ends in y, so it's earlier with i e. Be careful of that spelling. Small becomes smaller. Tidy. Again, it ends in
y, becomes tidy. Alright? And be careful about the
spelling of then and van. So then with an E
is talking about like the time or the result
is a totally different thing. When we're comparing, we're using them with an a. Alright, so pay attention to that
common spelling mistake. And we can see some
examples in contexts. So a cheetah is faster than
any other land animal. I get up earlier than my sister. The Middle East is
hotter than Europe. Europe and the United
States experienced colder winters than
anywhere in Africa. And the officers are
further away from my house than I
realized initially. And what you can notice
about the last sentence is that the van can be
a little bit later, sometimes a lot later
in the sentence. So don't think that you have to put the adjective and then
always tied together, the van can kind of walk off by itself and find its own
home in the sentence. Now, as always in English, there are some rules
that we can follow. And there are also some things that don't follow those rules. Some words that are irregular. So some comparative
adjectives are irregular. And we just have
to remember them. And some of those you'll
know very well already. E.g. good becomes better. There's no word gooder
in English. It better. Bad becomes worse. Far becomes can you guess
further, or father? Both of those are correct. Well, becomes better as well, and Little becomes less. Those are just some examples, but it's really good to pay attention to those examples and remember them because those are some common grammar
mistakes as well. And as I mentioned earlier, some comparative adjectives are longer when they're
quite long verb are quite long adjectives, we use more or we use less and we don't
change the adjective. So let's see some examples. Beautiful is always
my favorite example. We say more beautiful, difficult becomes more
difficult or less difficult. Interesting, more or
less interesting, exciting, more or less exciting. And you can see
that all of those are those longer adjectives. And with all of them, we can swap out more
and put in less. We could say much
more or much less, far more, far less. These are pretty
useful ones to use. I'm gonna give you
a little challenge. Now. I would like you to use these words that
I'm gonna give you. We've got some nouns and
we've got some adjectives. And I want you to try and
make five sentences for me. Picking different ones. You can be creative, make your own five sentences. And then we'll look at five
sentences that I've created. Alright, pause the video, write those five sentences now. All right, welcome back. Hopefully you've
written your sentences. Let's take a look
at some examples. So you can say, I think
this is a better deal than the one you
found yesterday. Alright? I can't decide between
these two laptops. It seems like this one is
actually more powerful. The weather only seems
to be getting worse. People say that
learning Russian is a more difficult language
to learn than many others, but mostly because the alphabet
isn't easy to remember. And my neighbor's dogs are a lot less noisy than mine.
I wonder why they're. So, those are just
some examples. There's almost unlimited
sentences that you could make, but the important thing is
to focus on the grammar. Makes sure that you've formed those comparative adjectives
in the right way. And something else to note is that particularly
in sentence three, we haven't used the word van. We don't always have to use it. Particularly if we
definitely know. What are the two
things that we're comparing with the weather? If we say the weather
is getting worse, we know that we're
comparing the weather now to the weather maybe before. So there's no need to say
worse than it was before. It's already suggested,
it's very obvious. So there's a little rule
to bear in mind as well. Now something that I hinted at before is adjective modifiers. So modifier is something
that changes the adjectives. We can change the
adjective and make it stronger or weaker. Let's take a look at how we
can use different words to show how big the differences
between adjectives. So a large difference, we could say a lot, or we could say much,
a small difference. We could say a bit, a
little bit slightly. When we use adjectives that
have more in front of them, like we said, more
beautiful, more interesting. We can use much more, and we can use far more. Let's take a look at a few
examples of those ones. First of all, this suitcase is a lot heavier than that one. So not just a little
heavier, a lot heavier. Your brother is bit
taller than you are. Traveling by train takes
slightly longer than flying, but it's much cheaper
and a bit more scenic. So the adjectives
that we have cheaper, we have a longer, we have scenic seen. It means it's very beautiful. You can see interesting things. And we have three different
modifiers as well. My study buddy reckons that this year's exam will
be far more difficult. So not just more difficult, far more difficult
than last year's, because we had much more time to prepare than the
previous class. I like the tone and the
aesthetics of this guitar. Aesthetics means
what it looks like. But mine is far more versatile. It's also much lighter. Now, something to note is that many people might want to say, it's very lighter, like this. My guitar is very lighter, but that's actually not right. That would be a grammar mistake. So we'd have to say
it's much lighter. Next, let's do a
quick review of the as, as something construction. So this one is pretty useful. It's good for comparing two
nouns and we can use it in the positive way to say that something is
as maybe as big. So like they're equal
or in the negative way, like not as big, not as good, things like that. So it can go both ways. Let's see some examples. My mother is not as
strict as my father. So we can see the construction
is we have the As, then we have the adjective, the other as, and then the noun of whatever
we're comparing. So here we're comparing
mother and father. And so the adjective goes
in the middle of the as-is, the two As, and the second
noun far that goes at the end. He's as tall as his father, so heat the pronoun,
the subject. And then his father
is the other noun. And then the
adjective is torque. Will it be as cold
as it was yesterday? Dogs aren't as
intelligent as cats. And flying business isn't flying business class isn't
as cramped as flying. Economy. Cramped is like when
you're stuck like this, there's no space to move. Something else we
have to review is superlative adjectives. So again, that's a
very complicated name. It just means when we're
talking about like the most or the least of
something, the extreme. Alright? So it's easy when we
see the examples. So weak becomes weakest,
large becomes largest. Happy. Now, be careful of the spelling. Happiest with delete
the y and put a EST. Gentle becomes gentlest and expensive becomes
the most expensive. Alright? So, or we could also say
the least expensive there. Most and least, when it's one of those longer adjectives like beautiful, interesting,
or expensive. Okay, let's see some examples. This suitcases the heaviest
of all our luggage. Your brother is the tallest
child in his class. So it doesn't just mean
that your brother is tall. It means that he has
been number one. And that's the feeling of a superlative adjective that
it's the number one thing. Traveling by train
takes the longest, but it costs the least. And for this, we can
imagine that we're talking about three different
ways of travelling. Or maybe more. You might be talking
about car, plane, train. Maybe bike. Bike would be longer than train. Let's say we're talking
about car, plane and train. And so we're saying that
the longest one is train. So that's the number
one out of three. We don't use
superlative adjectives. When we're talking
about only two, then we would use
comparative, longer. But when it's three
or more things, we start to use superlative. This year's exam might
be the most difficult. Here is the cheapest guitar
we have in your price range. And this might be the worst
movie I've ever seen. Alright, so let's do a quiz now. And in this quiz, I want
you to take a look at this. So this is a big table and it has the regular adjectives
on the left lane, goods small, difficult than
it has the comparative. That's when there are
two, usually with ER, then the superlative, which is the number one when there
are three or more things. So we can see the green
example at the top. Good, better than the best. What I want you to do
is pause this video and try to fill in all
of those gaps. So take your time. Do your best. If you need to re-watch some of the video to help
you, that's fine. And after that, I will
see you for the answers. Pause the video now. Alright, let's take a look. So here we go. Small, smaller
than the smallest, difficult, more difficult
than the most difficult. Bad is worse than the worst. Be careful of those
worse, the worst. That's a very
important distinction. And many people make
a mistake there. Little less than
the least, more, more than the most kind, kind of n and the kindest
hungry, hungrier than spelling. Know why? And the hungry
just successful, long word, more successful than
the most successful, enjoyable, more enjoyable
than the most enjoyable. So that is a review
of adjectives. Hopefully that's all clear. Of course, any questions
you can send me a message and I'll be waiting
for you in the next video.
6. Th Words Review : Welcome back. In this video, we're going to take a look at four very important
th words and makes sure that you know
exactly how to use them and when they are this, that these and those, let's quickly review them. So these are called determiners. Determiners like this, that
these and those are placed before a noun to show which
noun is being talked about. And we've got some applications that means the different uses. So they can be determiners. They used to talk this
and that are used to talk about singular nouns. So this dog, that dog
when there's only one. And these, and those are used
to talk about plural nouns. These dogs, three dogs, maybe those dogs,
five dogs over there. So we can use it in that way. They can also be pronouns. They can replace the
nouns in a sentence. So you could say, this is really delicious. It might be a piece of cake. Alright? But you can just say this or that looks
very interesting. And we can use them to
talk about proximity. So this is talking about
something close to us, nearby, and that is
something far away. Proximity means how
close something is. On a timeline. If we think about time, this is usually talking
about something now. Whereas that can be talking
about the past or the future. And let's take a
look at how we use them with singular
and plural nouns. So you could say this
house is enormous. So if it's more than one, these houses are enormous. You can see that the, the noun is changing houses, so it's more than one. So we use these and we also use R because it's now a vague, alright, so the R is talking
about plural, more than one. This house is one house. These houses are
more than one house. This burger is delicious. May I please get the
recipe from you? Recipe? Is that the way
that you make the burger? First you get the
blah-blah-blah. These burgers are delicious. May I please get the
recipe from you? Now, something to
note is that even though we've said these
burgers for the second one, we haven't said
recipes because it's just one recipe that's made all of the burgers
that we're eating, if we're eating three burgers, but they've all been made
from the same recipe. Then there's no need
to add S to recipe, but it's more than one burger. So we say these
burgers are delicious. And let's take a look
at a few more examples. So this is my sister, just one. These are my sisters. So two or three or ten or
however many sisters you have. This is my suitcase, just one. These are my suitcases,
more than one. And we can see proximity. How close something is. This is my house. So it's like you're in
the house or you're standing outside but
close to the house? That is my house. That's when the house
could be far away. Look over there. That is my house. These are my suitcases here, in my hand or in my by my
feet are very close to me. Those are my suitcases. That means the suitcases
are far away over there. We could also say, these are my suitcases and
those are yours. So that means your
bags are close and the other person's
bags are far away. And of course remember that far away is something
that's relative. Like if we're thinking
about the suitcases, it might be that
they are 10 m away or on the other side of the room or the other
side of the airport. But of course they're not on
the other side of the world. So it doesn't need to be very, very, very far away. So it really depends
on the situation. And a few more examples just to help us be totally
clear on these ones. This is an exciting
game of football. So we're talking
now about the time. That means the football
game is happening. Now, it's currently happening. This, that was, or, that will be an exciting
game of football that's talking about the
past or the future was, is the past will
be as the future. So the game has already ended
or it hasn't started yet. So this is talking about now, that past or future. Then this is my highest
achievement and I'm proud to it, accept this award in
front of all of you. And that means that the
award ceremony is happening. Now is we're doing it. You're standing there.
People have said, congratulations, you have
great English grammar. Here's an award and he said, Well, I studied so hard. Thank you so much. This is a great award. Or those were my
highest achievements. So it's more than one. And because we're saying those, we know that this is something
that happened in the past. I'm proud to show you
the awards I receive. Alright? The rest of the sentences
in the past tense, so we know this one must
be in the past as well. So the awards were
received in the past. So there you go. Hopefully with these examples. All of this becomes
pretty clear. If of course, if, if not, any questions, just let me
know, I'll be happy to help. And of course, as always, I'll be waiting for you with another thing to review
in the next video. See you there.
7. Prepositions Review Part 1: In this video, let's take
a look at prepositions. So that's a big word. But really, you
know what they are, those are words like to
n of those little words. So let's learn, let's
review prepositions. So they are the words that
we use to connect nouns, noun phrases and pronouns. Together. They're
connecting words. And they show relationships
like time, place, direction, spatial relationships like
next to on top of under, and introductions as well. And some common ones, there are a lot and
you can see them all here in buy into, onto, and so on. Alright, a lot of them and something that is kind of
annoying about English, but we just have to accept it, is that there aren't really too many rules
about prepositions. Will look at some
rules in this video, but in general,
they're idiomatic. That means they make
up their own rules and we just have fixed
ways of using them. So the best way to remember
them is to read lots of sentences that use them in the correct way and just
remember those sentences. So how are prepositions used? So they can be used at
the start of a sentence, in the middle of a sentence
or at the end of a sentence. And we can have many of them
in an individual sentence. Let's take a look
at some examples. I live on Madison Street in Lower East Side,
New York City. There are two Greenfield's
next to the school buildings. On Fridays. I finished work a bit earlier, usually around 03:00 P.M. and then the last one has a lot. I'm listening to the entire Led Zeppelin
discography at the moment. There is so much music on Spotify to explore
and listen to. Alright, so there you go. Just some examples to give you a feeling and a reminder about
how we use prepositions. Now, one of the rules
that we can learn is related to prepositions
and gerunds. So, what are gerunds? Gerunds are when we get a verb and we put the
ING ending on the end, like running, dancing, singing. But we use it as a noun. We don't use it as a verb. E.g. I. Like singing. Singing in that sentence
is a noun, It's a gerund. Here's the rule. If a verb, if a gerund is used immediately
after a preposition, the verb must take
the gerund form. Alright, so what does that mean? Let's take a look
at some examples. So after leaving work, so the after is the preposition, and it's not after leave
work or after to leave work. It's after leaving work so that, that verb leaf becomes a gerund, it becomes a noun. Alright, So there's one example. Another one, instead of,
that's our preposition. Instead of going straight
home after work again. So it's not instead of go, it's instead of going. And finally, by working, by the preposition and working
is the gerund, the verb. By working harder than
anyone else, he succeeded. Okay, so that is a general rule, but there is one very
important exception one time when we don't
follow that rule. So you can see the little box. So this doesn't include two. When verbs used
to in the infant, The genitive form like
to do to go to sleep. E.g. if we say I need two, it would be I need to sleep, not I need to sleeping even
though too is a preposition. Okay. So that's
the one exception. Other than that, we
should follow this rule. Let's talk about
some general rules for prepositions of place now. So what are
prepositions of place? They are used to
show the position of something related
to something else. Alright, and we'll see
some examples in a minute. But in general, if
we use the word in, It's going to be putting
a noun or a thing, or a person in a large area
could be in a country, in a city, or in a neighborhood. If we use at, it's a very
specific exact location. Okay, So N is
something very big at, is a very specific location. And on Is usually on top
of something else. So it could be on a bed, on a computer screen
and things like that. And we've got a lot
of examples that you can look at here as well. Will be in the waiting
room when you're done. So the waiting room is
like a big area and will be somewhere in
that waiting room. The kids are playing
in the back garden. So it could be
quite a big garden. I was born in Portugal, but I grew up in Spain, in the countryside,
again, all big areas. Then at he's working at his
desk in the room next door. So your desk is like one
fixed specific place at your desk will meet you at the entrance when
you're finished inside. So just at the door, you can drop me off
at the next corner, then I'll meet you at the
field when you find parking. And then on your phone is
on the kitchen counter. The counter as the thing
on the top in the kitchen when you're chopping and
you do things like that. So it's on top of that. Did you go hiking this weekend? There's a lot of dirt
and mud on your clothes. Your clothes are very
close to need a wash. There's lots of dirt and
mud on your clothes. And finally, be careful walking
barefoot in the kitchen. I broke a cup in here
this morning and there is glass on the floor. So what you can do if you want to study
these by yourself, you can learn these
specific sentences as a way of reminding you. Because I'm sure that you might be watching
this and thinking, well, at the field, surely a field is a big place. But remember, as I
said at the start, English is quite idiomatic
with its prepositions. So we have the way that we say things and it follows
some kind of rule. But really you just have to remember when we
use this one on, when we use that one. So that's why having these
example sentences to learn and practice by yourself
is a very important thing. And of course, if we want
to give more details, we can use what are called
precise prepositions of place. These ones show like exactly
where that thing is, where the noun is. Some examples really help here. So my degree is
hanging on the wall. So on is already a preposition
above my bookshelf. So the above gives
even more details. I live near the train station next to the old fire station. So again, it's more
detailed, more specific. My cat's favorite place
to sleep is between, or we can say in-between,
It's the same. Me and my wife. The rubbish bin is in the cupboard in so we know it's somewhere
in the cupboard. But we give more
details and say below or beneath or under or
underneath the sink. There's a mop broom
behind the kitchen door. Please park on the grass on the opposite side of the road. So three different prepositions. They're giving a
very specific place that you should Park. Sorry, I'm late. I got stuck behind a
truck all the way here. Now that we've
talked about place, Let's talk about time,
prepositions of time. So prepositions of
time show the time, the timing of an action. And they're useful
for when we talk about our plans for doing something or a normal routine
for what we do every day. And the most common
ones are on at. And so let's look at
some general rules. On is used about specific days. At, is used to provide an exact time when
something will happen. And N is used for
periods of time like months or seasons or
morning, afternoon, evening. And it has a similar
meaning to during. And we can take a look
at some examples. And once again, you can take these examples and
study them yourself. So unfortunately, I'll
have to work on Saturdays. It's on a specific day. On Fridays we end
work and our earlier. I'll help you update your
computer on the weekend. Or we could say I'll
help you update your computer at the weekend. So that depends if you
prefer American English that's more on the weekend
or British English? At the weekend. On Fridays I finished
work at 04:00 P.M. so at the time
at dinner time, you may not have your
phones at the table. That's what a parent
would say to that child. In the morning. I like to enjoy my
coffee outside. They're going on
vacation in December. And I was born in 1998
in the spring time. So those are some examples
of those three rules. Inaction. When we're
talking about time. We can use to
prepositions past and to, to give the specific time. If we're saying like,
what time is it now? And these are used
for telling the time. We use past to talk about
a time after the hour. We use to to talk about a time
before we reach the hour. And that tells you
how much time is left before the next hour. So let's see some examples. It's 06:20, so that's 620 or 18, 20 we say 06:20. It's 09:30, 930 or
21 30 it's 02:15, which is 02:15 A.M.
in the morning or 14, 15, and then it's 2026. This is the one that
sometimes confuses people. That would be 540 or 17402026. So there's still 20 min left
before we get to 06:00. It's 01:45. 01:45. If you want to say that
in a British way, you say it's 01:45 to two
and that's 145 or 13, 45. And then something else to
know is that here in the UK, we often say half nine. We delete the past
and we just directly say it's half nine
or it's half two. And that means the
same as half-past.
8. Prepositions Review Part 2: Now let's take a look at
someone's that people do sometimes get confused
about and we'll mix up, and those are from
unto between an end. So these are two pairs of prepositions that
usually go together. So these two pairs of prepositions
have the same meaning. And both of them
show when something starts and when it ends. So they show duration. That's how long something lasts. And we can use them in most
situations interchangeably. That means we could
say from and two, or we could say between
an end. So e.g. if you're writing an
essay and you want to show good variety
in your vocabulary. Then in, let's say the first sentence you
could use from and to. And then the second
sentence you could use between an end. It's the same meaning,
but you're showing how good your range
of vocabulary is. Some examples that
I work from 09:00 A.M. to 05:00 P.M. or I work between 09:00 A.M. and
05:00 P.M. so it's the same. It's 8 h or the movie
runs for about 2 h. So that would be from 08:00 P.M. to 10:00 P.M. or it would be between 80 08:00 P.M.
and 10:00 P.M. and again, the duration, how
long it lasts is 2 h. The next two prepositions to
look at, until and since. And in my time as
an IRS examiner, this is one of the most common preposition
mistakes that I heard. So let's pay attention
carefully here. So until is used to show when an activity or a
situation will end. And since is used to show when a situation or activity
started. Okay? The important thing is
that for both of these, that situation or
activity is ongoing, that means it's happening now. So you can think
about it like this. You're in the middle
of that activity. If you're using until, it means you're looking forward to the end
of the activity. And you're saying when it
will end, if you're using, since that means you're
looking back to the start of the activity and talking about maybe how long you've
been doing it. Often sensors used
to complain and say, Oh, I'm so tired. I've been working since
06:00 A.M. this morning. But not always. It doesn't have to
be a complaint. Let's see some examples. I will be working until
05:00 P.M. today. Now could be like 01:00 P.M. and we're looking
into the future. The project will be
running until December. Now it could be, let's say, June or July or September. Inflation will keep rising
until the supply in shape, supply chain crises ends. And then I have been working since 09:00 A.M. and
I'm really tired now. The project has been
running since January. So it started in January
and it's still going. Inflation has been rising since the supply
chain crisis started. And something to
notice that since is often used with the
present perfect tense. E.g. I. Have been working
here since 2015. E.g. you're looking back to the start and saying how
long you've been doing that. Another example, I've
been reading here since I had been
living there, since. Then we say, when did it start? Until and since something
important to remember, the next tool that
we're going to look at are for and during. So four is going to show how long something has
been happening. So what's the length of time, the duration as we saw before, but during is a
little bit different. During is going to show the time that something
was happening. But usually we'll then say
something else happened. So jarring is like
creating that situation, creating the background
of the sentence. And we say something else
happened in that time. And during doesn't
show the duration. It doesn't show how long
the thing was happening. And some examples
we'll make this clear. So first of all, I work out or exercise for an
hour every morning. So the amount of time
that I'm working out is 1 h. I've been working out
for an hour already. So my my exercising started 1 h ago and it's
still going for is another very common
preposition that we use with the
present perfect tense. I've been doing something. For how long will you be busy? Or we could say, how long
will you be busy for? That means, what is the duration of the
time you will be busy? Then during my workout. So while I was working out
and we don't know if that was a 10 min of exercise or
3 h or a whole week. During my workout, I got
a call from my neighbor. I lost 2 kg, two kilos during the
first COVID-19 lockdown. I think that's
probably the opposite experience of most people. Most people would say, I gained five kilos during
the first lockdown. Um, but again, we don't
know how long that locked down is because
we're using that word jury. My brother was never
late for a class during his university career. So the whole time that he was, that he was never late. The next preposition we're
going to review is by now. By is very versatile. That means it's very flexible. It can do many different things. It can be used to
show who or what is responsible for something,
who did something. Or it can show the manner
that something was performed. That means the way
that we do something. And we'll see some examples. Macbeth was written by
William Shakespeare. The song was written
by an unknown singer. So that's showing
who was responsible. And then we traveled to work
by train or by walking. So that is the way
that we do it. The manner I fixed the Internet
by restarting the router. So that was the way
that I fixed it. My method by waking up earlier, you can get an
extra hour of peace and quiet before
the kids wake up. Which sounds like
a good suggestion. Now let's do a quick review
of width and without. So with is again,
very versatile. It's a great word to
add to your vocabulary. Very flexible. It can do a lot of things. So it can be used to
show the obvious one, who you were accompanied by, who was with you. It can also show the
possession of something. That means when
something has something, a pizza with lots
of cheese, e.g. or it can show an object that was used to perform an action. So what do you do
this thing with? Let's see some examples. And of course, without
is the opposite meaning. So I went to play football
at the park with Joe, meet and Joe did it together. Joe twisted his ankle. So we'll play without
him today. Bad luck job. We need to move to a
city with less crime. So this is the example
of the possession. So the city has a lot of crime. We want to find a
city with less crime. We want to live in a city
without crime and poverty. I made this menu with
Photoshop and Canva. Those were my tools that I used. That's how I finished this
job without any software. I'm not sure you can
design the menu. And the final preposition
that we're going to review in this video is about, about, is when we're talking more about a topic
we're expanding. And a good phrase that you
can learn is on the topic of, so it has the same meaning as about, let's
see some examples. The book is about bravery,
love, and redemption. On the topic of bravery. This is a fantastic book. Alright, let's watch a
documentary about travel tonight. The topic of travel. Let's watch a travel
documentary tonight. I don't understand
what you're talking about while we're on the topic. Could you please
explain that again? Okay. So on the topic is a
pretty useful one to add. And there's a review
of about as well. So just before we finish, it's time for you to
have a try at this. So I want you to choose the correct preposition for
each of these sentences. So let's take a quick look. Children, please take a seat. Your desks. My daughter
was sick Monday. My daughter has been
sick last week. I don't go to school anymore. I learned Spanish. My university career. Be careful about that one. School holidays start
Wednesday, and the last one. Driving slower, we will
reduce our fuel costs. Okay, so I want you to
pause the video now. And I want you to have a
try at these sentences. And I recommend that you
type them out completely. Because by typing them or by writing them on your notepad, you'll be able to get
a good muscle memory. You'll really put your
what you know into action. It's just, it's
one thing knowing the theory, another thing, repeating and doing
it again and again, so that you don't even have to think about what the
right preposition is. Prepositions and lots of grammar
are all about repeating, repetition, doing
it again and again, so that you get
good muscle memory. Alright, so pause the
video, have a try now. Alright, let's take a look. So children please take
a seat at your desks. My daughter was sick on Monday. I think those two
are pretty easy. Let's take a look at some
more difficult ones. My daughter has been
sick since last week. So has sickness
started last week? The present perfect tense, as we said before, I don't
go to school by car anymore. I learned Spanish during
my university career. Alright, so we're talking about the time that
that was happening. So the background is
my university career. Then it's another action
happening in that time. School holidays
start on Wednesday. By driving slower, we will
reduce our fuel costs. So that is a review of some of the most common
prepositions in English. I hope you found that useful. Of course, as always, any
questions you can send me a message and I'll
be waiting with another review in the next
video. See you there.
9. Conjunctions Review: In this video,
we're going to take a look at conjunctions and review some of the most
common conjunctions. So what are conjunctions? Conjunctions are
words that connect other words or phrases
or clauses together. A clause is like a full
piece of a sentence, and we'll see many
examples as we go. And we use these to
avoid repeating words. The most common conjunction is, and we know that one, of course. So some examples very
simply, there's a school, there are the children
that has a school, and there are the children. I ate too much sugar today. I feel sick. I ate
too much sugar today, and I feel sick. And finally, my
mother is a teacher, my sister is a teacher. My mother and my sister
are both teachers. Or you could just
say my mother and my sister are teachers. So we use are because of
course, it's two people. My mother is, my sister is, my mother and sister are. Then we move on to
looking at commas. Now, this is a common mistake, a common mistake, a common
mistake that people make. So let's take a little look and make sure that we
avoid this mistake. When you're listing
more than two items, you're making a list
in your sentence. And there are three or
four or five things. You need to use commas between all of the different
items on the list. Only the last item should have
the end placed before it. So example, There's a school,
there are other children. There is the headmaster, there's a school comma. There are other children, comma, and that is the headmaster. Alright? This is called a list of three. And it's a very useful
way of writing. It's quite effective
and powerful. If you make lists of three, they said that three
is the magic number. I ate too much sugar
today, I feel sick. I need to go home. I ate too much sugar today. I feel sick and I
need to go home. The next conjunction
to look at is, but let's take a look at, but this conjunction is used
to contrast two clauses. So when you're saying two things are disagreeing with each other, or to join a positive statement with a negative statement. Alright, let's see
some examples. There's a hotel, there
isn't a restaurant. There's a hotel comma, but there isn't a
restaurant inside. The hotel is, let's say
the positive thing. And the lack of the restaurants
is the negative thing, because now, now will be hungry. I wanted to study in London. My grades weren't good enough. I wanted to study in London, comma, but my grades
were to live. My grades weren't good enough. My children will eat
vegetables comma, but only if there is
a source with them. So that one of course is
giving a positive thing. My children will eat vegetables, but there's a negative as well. Only if there's something nice. Only if they get pizza
and donuts as well. I will help you with your
math homework comma, but you must help me with
my biology homework. Alright, so positive
thing, I'll help you, but negative thing, you
have to help me as well. Now a word that many people
use or at least know about, but don't always use
in the right way or feel confident using is yet. So let's take a look at yet. So it's similar to but, but we use it when two clauses
contradict each other. So it's like there's no logic between these two
parts of the sentence. That'll be clear
with an example. We can use it with AMD, we say. And yet when we want
to give some emphasis, we really want to focus on that problem or
that contradiction. It's 32 degrees
Celsius outside comma. Yet Oliver is wearing
a jersey, so it's hot. Yet he's got lots of clothes on. So it's not very logical. It doesn't really
make sense that we're chooses available
to help you yet. You still failed the test. It's a very strict
parents talking there. I asked you to be quiet and yet you continue to
talk in class, alright? And you can notice
where there are commas here and where there
aren't commas. So when yet is by itself, we need to have a
comma before that. And when we do, and yet
no comma is needed. Another common conjunction
to review is all. Let's take a look at or we use, or when there is
a choice between two or more different options. And it can be used also to show the consequences of doing something or not
doing something. It's kind of like a threat. When e.g. your parents
are saying Eat your food or you won't
get any dessert? That was something that
my parents told me a lot. So it's like a threat. They're saying what will happen if you don't do the right thing, study hard, or you
will fail the test. So some examples. Would you like
chicken or beef, sir? I would like a
draft or bottle of beer or a glass of wine
if there's no beer left. Now something we
should pay attention to is where we've used
the commas there. So you can see the
chicken or beef. Those are just two nouns, two different options
that are very short. So when we do it like that, apples or oranges, big or small, then we don't need a comma. But in the second sentence, you can see there's a comma
after a comma before the or. And that's because we're
connecting to different clauses, two parts of the sentence. So I would like a draft
or bottle of beer. That one is one clause. And then the second clause needs to be separated
by a comma. If we didn't have a comma, we would read it
like I would like a draft or bottle of
beer or a glass of wine. If there is no beer left, it would be like weird
just vomiting words. So that's not good. We want to organize our, our writing better, make sure our grammar is really correct. Then another one, don't forget to charge your phone tonight, comma, or you won't be able
to listen to music tomorrow. This one is showing the
negative consequence, the bad thing that will happen. If you don't follow this advice, Be quiet when you come home or you might wake the baby up. We're getting on to the more
complicated conjunctions. Now, the next two we're
looking at our NOR and either. Alright. So when there is a list, there are two things that
are undesirable or untrue. Or we want to give
the feeling of no in a list we can use
nor between them. But, nor is a little
bit old fashioned. It's not totally unused now, but it's a little
bit old-fashioned. So often will use. And so let's see some examples. I've never eaten liver, nor do I want to. But probably more
commonly we would say, I've never eaten liver and
I don't want to either. Okay. So the first one is
kind of like what you might read from a book
in the 1850s or earlier. These days nowadays we
would probably say, and probably also write
the second version. But it's good to know both. It's good to have
the flexibility. Another example, he
can't play piano well, nor can he sing. But probably now we would say
he can't play piano well, and he can't sing either. Something to know is that
the EDA is optional. That's why it's in the brackets. But it gives an extra emphasis, is like saying, he's really bad. He can't sing, he
can't play the piano. So we're giving an extra feeling that the two are connected. We're putting emphasis,
but you don't have to. It's your choice if you
want to use that word either the final
conjunction to review is, so Let's take a look. So is used to
connect two clauses, two parts of the sentence, where there is a
causal relationship as a fancy way of saying
that one of them, one of the clauses are
parts of the sentence, is the cause of the other one. It makes the other one happened. Okay, So example, I haven't
eaten since we woke up. So let's stop for dinner now. Notice the comma there as well. So the two clauses, comma. And so my apartment was filthy, very dirty after the party. So my friends stayed behind
to help me clean it. My parents lived in
Germany before I was born. So they speak. Very good, Jim, by the
way, I'm saying comma. When I read these, just to make you notice it. When you're reading, you
definitely shouldn't say comma. It's something that if you please don't say that if
you're making a speech, my parents speak very
good German comma, and they are very nice. Full stop. Please don't do that. Alright. So I'm just doing that to help
you to make you notice it. Then the last thing we're
going to do is do quiz. So can you pick the right conjunctions
for these five sentences? Let's quickly take a look. My sister is
allergic to peanuts. Let's eat somewhere else. I woke up with a fever
and sore throat. My mom wouldn't
let me stay home. I don't like classical
music, jazz. I don't like opera either. It's a pretty tough one. I didn't attend class regularly. My professors still allowed
me to write the exam. Or I didn't attend
class regularly. My professor didn't allow
me to write the exam. So those two are pretty
close to each other. Be very careful
of those as well. So what I want you to
do is pause the video, write out the full sentence, and I'll be waiting for
you with the answers when you come back around, Let's take a look at
some answers then. My sister is
allergic to peanuts, so let's eat somewhere else. I woke up with a fever but my mom wouldn't let me
stay home. Thanks Mom. You're so mean, Mom? I don't like classical
music or jazz. And I don't like opera either. You could of course
say, nor do I like opera as we talked about. And either is more natural
these days, more modern. I didn't attend
class regularly yet. My professors still allowed
me to write the exam. You could also say Butts there. That would also be
fine, but it's good to use the word yet because it shows that you have more sophisticated, high
level grandma. I didn't attend class regularly, so my professor didn't allow me to write the exam.
So there we go. That is a review of some of
the common conjunctions. As always, any questions,
send me a message. I'll be happy to help and I'll be waiting for
you in the next video.
10. Subject & Object Review: Something important
for us to review is subject and object. We've talked about it
a little bit already. We're going to talk about
it in more detail now. So what is the subject, which is which the subject
is the person or the thing that performs the verb
action in a sentence. The subject does the thing. Alright? And it can be any kind of noun. It can be a common noun, proper noun and abstract
noun, a concrete noun. Or it can be a pronoun, like he or she, or it. The object is the
person or the thing that receives the verb action. So the verb is performed On or two or at this person or thing. And some examples, my sister
plays piano beautifully. So what is the verb action? It's plays, that's the verb, that's the thing
that is being done. The subject would of
course be my sister. And what does your sister play?
What does my sister play? The piano. Alright, so my sister
is the subject, plays is the verb, and piano is the object. The piano is receiving
the action of playing. Now something that's a
little bit difficult sometimes not in that
very simple example, but in more common
and regular rating. And also speaking,
it's difficult to identify the subject to figure out what is the subject
of this sentence. So the subject can
be just one word, just one name, let's say. Or it can be a long
group of words that have adjectives are multiple
nouns at the same time. We're gonna do a little exercise where I'm going to
give you sentences. And you're going to see if
you can find the subject. So we're going to start
easy and get harder. A big fat cat was sitting
at our door today. What is the subject
of this sentence? What do you think? Give you
a second to think about it. It is of course, a big fat cat. So the cat is the noun and
big fat or the Adjectives. Next one, I made our guests
some t. What's the subject? This one's easy. It's I I did the thing. I did the making. I am the subject, leases dog and James's cat loved to play in the back garden.
What's the subject? So leases dog and James
is cat or the subject, both of them together because they're doing it
at the same time. Or maybe they both like to
do it at different times. I don't think dogs and cats play very well together usually at, but in this sentence
they are both loving, playing in the back garden. So both of them are the subject. Finally, the teacher whose child got into a fight at school, drove past our school today. Set this is the huddle. What is the subject
of this sentence? What do you think?
So it should be the teacher whose child got
into a fight at school. This is a very long one, but if we think about it, we can see it's still
just one thing. It's still the teacher. The, whose child,
blah, blah, blah. Those are just extra details. The teacher is
still the subject. The teacher was
doing, the driving. And now that we've
identified the subject, Let's try and
identify the object. So the object can be just one word or it can
be something quite long. The same example,
the big fat cat was sitting at our door today. What is the object here?
What do you think? The object would be? Our door to our door is receiving the action
of the cat setting. I made our guests some T. Now, what is receiving
the action here? What is the object? The object would be some tea. And we're going to see that's
a tip is a difficult one. We'll see a little bit
more about that one later. Leases dog and James's cat loved to play in
the back garden. Object. The back garden, they
are receiving the plane. The back garden
is the recipient. A good word for you? Recipient of the play. And the teacher
whose child got into a fight at school drove
past our school today. The object would be our school. Now as we saw them with
the guests and the T, sometimes it can be
a little hard to figure out which
one is the object. And actually we can talk
about something important, which is indirect objects. Some sentences have two objects, a direct and an indirect object. And so far we've
been talking about the direct object so that
t was the direct object. This is the object on which
the verb action is performed. So we were making the tea, not making the guests. The indirect object is
the person or thing that receives the direct object. The guests received the t. We made the tea. The guests received
the t. So the t was the direct object and the guests with the indirect object. So another example, I gave
the gardener or lift home. The verb action
is to give, gave. Who does, who does it? I do. So I am the subject. And what did you do? You did a lift. And who did you
give the length to? The gardener. So I is the subject. Gave is the verb action. Lift is the direct object and the gardener is
the direct object. So now that we've reviewed
direct and indirect objects, we're gonna do a little quiz
to finish off this video. I want you to identify in
these sentences the subject, The direct object, and if it has one, the indirect object. Now, I'm not going to tell you which sentences have indirect objects and
which ones don't. You have to figure
that out for yourself? Maybe all of them do. Maybe none of them do. You have to remember the rule and figure
it out for yourself? So let's take a look. He threw the ball to me. My mom passed the salt
and pepper to her sister. The children went to
play at the park. Love and forgiveness
will set you free. The teacher gave us extra homework for
the school holidays. She gave her son some money, and she gave some
money to her son. Pause the video and
figure out the subject, the direct object and
the indirect object. Pause and have a try. Now. Alright, welcome back. Let's take a look
at those answers. So first of all, he
threw the ball to me. So he is the subject. And the thing that is
being thrown is the bowl. So that is the direct
object and indirect object. The person who receives
the ball is me, my mom, the subject, past
the salt and pepper, that's the direct
object to her sister. Her sister receives it. She's the indirect object. Now this one didn't have
an indirect objects. The children went to
play at the park. Love and forgiveness
will set you free. Alright? So love and forgiveness
is the subject and you is the person who
is becoming free. So it's you, you are the
object, direct object. Then this is a hard one. The teacher gave us. The teacher as the
subject us would be the indirect object. And then what do we receive? Extra homework. Thanks, teacher. So we get the extra homework, which is the direct object. She gave her son some money. So she is the subject
and the money is the direct object and her
son is receiving the money. He's the indirect object. And she gave some
money to her son. It's the same. Notice that
it's a different order, but the grammar logic is the same and the meaning
is the same. So that is a review of
subjects and objects. It can be a little bit
confusing. I know. So if you do have any questions, make sure to send me a message.
I'll be happy to help. And in the next video, we'll be moving on to a
different topic for review. So I'll be waiting
for you there.
11. Verbs Part 1 Review: Now let's take a look at verbs. So verbs, of course, are very important in English. And we're going to review, do a big review of
verbs in general. Set, Let's get started. What are verbs? Verbs basically are the actions that the things
that we're doing, the words we use when we
are performing an action, alright, so when
you do something, you need to use a verb. And there are many
different types of verbs. And in this video, we're gonna be looking at
those different types. And there's gonna
be some big words, some big scary words. But don't worry, you're already using all of these, these verbs. So it's just good to know
the names so that we understand the theory
behind English. So we can always have
really good grammar. Types of apps. We have main verbs and
these describe actions or they describe states of being. And we'll
see that later. They can connect the subject of a sentence with a
description of that subject. We also have auxiliary verbs, auxiliary and those
are helping verbs. They modify or change the
meaning of the main verbs, and they can form
different tenses. Again, we'll see pretty soon. And we can take a look
first at regular verbs. So regular is an important
word in English grammar. When we say something
is regular, we mean that it follows
the normal rules. It doesn't have anything
weird going on. Alright? So regular verbs
are the easy ones. We'll see some in just a second. So they follow a clear
pattern when they are converting or changing between the present and the past tense. So some examples. The base form would be walk, I walk past simple. Yesterday, I walked
to university, I walked to work, and the past participle. Now, that's an important word to remember past participle. That's kind of the
third form of the verb. And some famous ones are eaten. Done, scene. Taken, words like that. Those are kind of
like I have done. I have eaten things like that. Those are the past participle. But for all of these
ones, they're the same. We can look down this list. We've got call, cold and cold, cry, cried and cried. Studies, studied and
studied, and so on. So if it's regular verbs, the past tense and the past
participle stay the same. So it's nice and easy. If you know that something
is a regular verb, you already know how to
make it in the past tense, the past simple and
the past participle, you can just add the ED. But many verbs are annoying. They are the irregular,
irregular verbs. So not regular, not normal. And these ones, the
ending can change, or the way that we form it can change and we have to
memorize these ones. These ones have to be learned. E.g. base form is drink, past simple as drank, But the past
participle is drunk. I have drunk a lot of water, swim, swam and swum, come came and then back to come. And if we look down
towards the bottom, we've got things like
eat, ate and eaten. Go, went, gone, and then other ones stay the
same all the way through. Put, put and put, cost, cost and cost. Read, read and read. Be careful though for read, it would be red. So today I read, yesterday I read, I have read. It looks the same, but the pronunciation changes. So this is why we call
them irregular verbs. You really do have
to memorize them. So let's look at main verbs. So main verbs are like
the common verbs that we often use for actions that
we can imagine like play, walk, run, eats, laugh, drive, and so on. We can see some
example sentences just to break down the
logic and remember, what are the different
pieces of a sentence. So a very simple sentence, they drive to work. So they is the subject pronoun. The main verb is Dr.
two is a preposition, remember, and the
object is work. Alright? Another type of sentence, I practice English every day. Now, just to be clear, we don't need to add
that every day, but of course, many
sentences we do. So I is the subject, practice is the main verb, English is the object, and then the adverb
is every day. Now the main verbs are
relatively simple, so we're going to
move on to the. Auxiliary verbs, which are
quite a bit more complicated. They have a more
complicated name, and they actually are a
little bit more complicated. So they change the
meaning of the main verb. And they can make statements saying when something is true. They can ask questions. And they can also help us
form different tenses, change the time of our sentence, and in particular, we use
them for the perfect tense, present perfect, past,
perfect, future perfect. And so e.g. if we're forming the present
perfect simple tense, we would say something
like she or they has, or have passed the exam. She has passed the exam. They have passed the exam. So the sheet and the
day is the subject. The auxiliary verb is, has or have, the
past participle. Remember that word, past
participle is passed. And the objectives, the exam. And when we are forming
statements or questions, we're going to put
the auxiliary verb in different places. So e.g. we might say, Has she passed the exam? If we're asking a question. And we're gonna be looking
at in a lot more detail at the perfect tenses
later in this course. So watch out for
that because that is a super important part of
higher level English grammar. Now let's take a look at
some auxiliary verbs. First of all, statements. So when we're saying
that something is true, so the first one, Simone, is or isn't
feeling well, or they are, or
aren't feeling well. And we can see the
auxiliary verb goes there after subject, so it's subject first, auxiliary verb, main verb, and adverb at the end. Another example is with
to have, by the way, that first one was to be the second auxiliary
verb, to have. I have new shoes or
they have new shoes. So again, the auxiliary verb
is have an inner statement, it's coming after the subject. And then we have the adjective and we have the
object at the end. And To-Do. Another very common
auxiliary verb. Ashley does or doesn't
eat red meat a week, do or don't eat red meat. So again, subject,
auxiliary verb, main verb, and the object. So those are statements, but now let's see how it changes when we make
it into a question. So you can see the first one, is Simone feeling well? So the is, is going there at the start or isn't
Simone feeling well? And are, or aren't
they feeling well? This time the auxiliary
verb is at the start, it's before the subject, and that's how we
make a question. If we do to have we say, Have I got new shoes? It's a strange question. Have I got new shoes? Or have they got new shoes? Probably a more common
question to ask. Again, auxiliary
verb at the start. And to do, does or doesn't, do or don't goes at the start. Let's move on to a
different type of verb now. And these ones are
linking verbs. So linking verbs connect the subject to the
adjective, alright? And quite often they're
related to the five senses. So touching something,
sight, smell, hearing, and taste set in sentences
with linking verbs, the word which describes the subject is
called a complement. It's a compliment. Now that's different to
a complete with an I, which is when you say
something's very nice, oh, what a lovely hat. That one is a complement. We pronounce them the same, but we spell them differently. Some common linking verbs, or is or seems, B and becomes bean, fields, being was,
appears or work. And you can see a lot of
those other different forms of to be, but some other verbs as well. So let's see some examples. So our pets are starving. Starving means very,
very, very hungry. So our is the pronoun, possessive pronoun, the
pets is the subject here. Now the linking verb is r, then the complement is starving. And something to note
is that the compliment? So here it's starving. It has to describe the subject. So the starving, that
feeling of being very, very, very hungry is
describing the pets. The pets is the subject. And we can see some more
linking verbs here. So my son feels nervous. So the subject is sent, the linking verb is fields, and then the complement, the adjective is nervous. I am an English teacher, and the complement
is English teacher. It's talking about the subject. The subject is I and
the linking verb. So one form of to be the
view looks spectacular. The subject, the view linking verb is looks and the
complement is spectacular. And that smells delicious. And you can see that the, that is talking
about some things. And we already know what it
is before the conversation. They might have been saying,
Look what I've been cooking, it's a delicious chicken and
all that smells delicious. And we know that the, that is
talking about The chicken. Alright? And that is what's
called a determiner. So the, that is the subject, smells is the linking
verb and the compliment. The adjective is delicious. Now let's quickly
review modal verbs. Modal verbs are a type
of auxiliary verb, and they often
used to talk about the possibility or
the obligation. So possibility is like
something might happen. Or obligation is can, we must do this or
we should do this. The things that we should do. And they often form
different tensors. And particularly they
form the perfect tenses. That means that they're
quite useful for giving recommendations or advice or instructions and also
asking questions like that. E.g. should I do this thing? And some modal verbs
we have, Shao, should, can, could, will, would,
may, must, might. Alright, so all of those
are gonna be kinda changing the feeling
of the main verb. We can think about them as auxiliary verbs because they're used in the same
way as modal verbs, like ought to need two, has two. We're going to look more at modal verbs later in
the course as well.
12. Verbs Part 2 Review : The next thing to talk
about is something that seems very simple, but many people
make mistakes on. And so it's really important
for us to review it. Even though you're
probably thinking, oh, now, I know this, this is probably the most common grammar
mistake that I see. So it's all about
verb conjugations. So verb conjugations or
when the verb changes, depending on various factors. So it could be the person, like if it's singular or plural, more than one, and also
the tense as well. So how does it work? We have first-person,
second-person, and third person. First-person is I, if
it's just one or it's we, if it's more than 1, s
person is you or you. So you could be just one person or it could be like all of you. If you're making a speech. And the third person
is he, she or it, or they, he, she, or it is the one to
be careful about. So let's do an example
for the verb to speak. So the conjugations or I speak, you speak, he,
she, or it speaks. There's the difference. There's the thing that
everybody forgets, particularly when it's an it. So it can be talking
about anything like, it could be something like Love. It could be happiness. It could be the government. It could be this pointer. It could be my hand. All of those things are in it. And when it's an, IT, it means we have to change
the ending of the verb. We have to add that S. Then in the plural we have, we speak, you speak,
and they speak. So there was a present tense and now let's take a quick look at the past and the
future simple tensors. So for the past tense, some verbs are regular
as we talked about, and some are not regular. Irregular, irregular verb forms have to be memorized,
as we said. So if it's speak, the past tenses spoke,
it's not speak. Spoke. So this one is irregular. I spoke, you spoke he, she or it spoke. Remember no. S that in the past simple tense. We spoke, you spoke,
and they spoke. So in this sense,
it's pretty easy. There's no little
annoying changes as long as you can remember. Today I speak. Yesterday,
I spoke, then you're okay. And to form the
future simple tense, we just add, well, that's very easy as well. I will speak. You will speak. He, she or it will speak again. No. S We will speak. You will speak. They will speak. Something else to
remember is that in the future simple tense, we can change it for, we can change wheel
and replace it with an going to or are going
to, is going to. So you might say he
is going to speak, I am going to speak. And that I would say
is much more natural, particularly in spoken English. I would very rarely say
I will speak later. It would be I'm going
to speak later. Or if we want to
get very specific, we could say, I'm
gonna speak later. That's all that's in a
pronunciation course. You can check that
class out in our shop. The next tends to look at is the present continuous tense. So if we're conjugating the verb into the
present continuous form, we're adding the I, N, G, the famous ING. So it would be the subject. And then some form of
to be like an is R. And then the verb with I-N-G. And there are some
different spelling rules. This one can get a
little bit tricky. We're going to see some
spelling rules shortly. But let's take a look for speak, like we'd been looking before. So I am speaking. So it's m and then G. I am speaking. You are speaking. He, she, or it is speaking. We are speaking. You are speaking,
they are speaking. Then let's look at the past
and future continuous. So when we're forming the continuous form of
the verb in the past, we're gonna be adding was or were instead of the m is odd. So I was speaking you
were speaking he, she or it was speaking? We were speaking. You were speaking and
they were speaking. Alright, so really the
important thing is just to remember which form of To be we need to use
if it's present, it's gonna be I am you, are he, she or it is. And then if it's past, it's gonna be I was he she it was and the rest
of them are worth. Then if it's the
future continuous, we're gonna be
adding will be cell, I will be speaking, you will be speaking. He, she, or it will be speaking. And the rest of them will
be speaking as well. So that one is very
easy to remember. Something else to note is
that you can replace the will be with Tooby going to be, which is a little bit confusing. You might say, I am
going to be speaking, he is going to be speaking. And it's a pretty
common use as well. So then we can take
a quick look at the whole table of all of the
different forms of speak. So we have the past,
which is spoke, or the continuous past
was or were speaking. We have the present
speak or speaks. That's the most common one
that people make mistakes on. The simplest one, or
the continuous present, which is, is And, or are speaking and the future will speak for simple or
is or are going to speak. And for the future. Continuous will be speaking. Or I'm going to be speaking, is going to be speaking. Now as promised,
we're going to take a look at those spelling rules for continuous verbs because this can be a little
bit confusing. So most of the time we're
going to be adding I-N-G. But depending on the ending of the verb in the normal form, in the base form. That can be some changes to
the way that we spell it. So let's, let's take
a quick look at the list of the rules and then we'll look
at some examples. So for most verbs and
all verbs that end in W, X, or Y, we're just
going to add i-n-g. Nice and easy for verbs that
have a silent e at the end. So that's an E that is written, but we don't say it. Then we're going to
take away that E. And we're going to add i-n-g for short one syllable verbs, so syllable is just one sound. E.g. Apple has two
syllables and pull. So if the word only
has one syllable, then we're going to
double the last letter. So if it ends in t, we're going to add
another T. And then ING. For verbs that end in e, we're going to change the
E to a y and then add i-n-g for two syllable verbs, where the final
syllable is stressed, double the final
letter and add i-n-g. Now it's starting to
read like, you know, when you buy a new machine and you have to read
the instruction manual, there's better if we take
a look at some examples. And one more rule is for
two syllable verbs where the final syllable is
not stressed at ING. So some examples of
those rules in action. So the first one for most of herbs and all
verbs ending in w, x, and y at an I-N-G. So du becomes doing B, being GO, going fix, Fixing, cook, cooking, row is rowing. You can also pronounce
that Rao and rowing. It's an interesting
part of English. So rho is like when
you're in a boat and Rao is to argue with someone
and fly becomes flame. So there was a very easy, right? Then it gets a little
more complicated. The silent e at the end, we're going to take away the E. So make, the, the end
of that is sound. It's not make key. We didn't say
Mickey, we say make. So making. So we delete the
E and add i-n-g. Take, taking, share, sharing, have, having, right
becomes writing. The next rule is for those
short one syllable verbs. And what we're going to
double the last lap. Swim becomes swimming. To run, running with two ends. Sit, sitting, and get, getting, and both of
those have double t. And then for verbs
that end in e, we're going to change the
IEEE to y and add I-N-G. So dy becomes dying. It's kind of an
unusual one, right? So it changes a lot. Lie becomes lying. Then we move on to the
stressed two syllable verbs. So if it's a two syllable verb
where the final syllable, the second syllable is stressed. We double the final
letter and add I-N-G. So commit, you can
hear it's commit. It's not commit is commit. The stress is on the MIT. So we add an extra T and
say committing, submit, submitting, prefer, preferring,
and forget, forgetting. And then verbs that are
also two syllables, but the stresses at the start. We do this one, we go whisper,
whispering, visit. You can have visit. It's not visit, visit, visiting, benefit, benefitting
and upload, uploading. And all of those. We're not going to
double that last letter. We're just adding I-N-G. Now, as always in English, there are exceptions
to the rule, which is just the
way that English is. There's always some extra stuff that you have to just remember. So it helps keep people
like me in a job. So let's take a look at some verbs that don't follow
the rules and we have to memorize the first one is age to get older and that's aging. Even though the E is silent, we keep the E and
we add the I and j. You just have to remember
and be careful as well because there is another word
in English which is aging, AG ING, you might say my
aging father, my aging dog. And that's an adjective, which means a dog or a
father that's getting older. So if it's the adjective, then it's a G, I, N G. If it's the verb,
it's AGE, I and j. My dog is aging very quickly. E.g. That's just English. That's just what you
have to remember. Die. Now this is when you change the color of something,
becomes dying. Singe. When you burn something a little bit, it
becomes synching, binge when you like, eat or drink too
much very quickly, or watch Netflix over and
over again without stopping. That becomes ING picnic. We're going to add a k
If you can believe it. And of course, this
isn't the complete list of those irregular verbs. But for now it's some of the ones that you
might come across. Now, finally, let's
do a little quiz, a little spelling test
to see how well you know these spelling rules
for the continuous verbs. So you can see a big list
there on the screen. I want you to actually write on paper or on your computer,
maybe on your phone. I want you to actually write out the correct spelling of
the continuous form. So the I-N-G form. So you can start with, you can start with stop and go budget and forget and all
of those, right meat. What is the correct spelling
with the ING added? Pause the video. Have a try now. Alright, let's take a
look at the answers. We have stopped becomes
stopping with double P. Budget, budgeting,
forget double tee, forgetting dy becomes dying. Die of actually dying, passing away becomes
DY ING picnic we know we add the k
visit is just regular. Shave deletes that silent
E, singe and binge. Don't delete the
silent e because that irregular run
is double n running. B is being lie. To tell a lie is LY ING age. We talked about that one
becomes aging, getting older. Trials trying and regret
adds a T for regretting. So that is a review of the main things that we
need to know about verbs. And of course, later
in the course, we'll be looking in
more detail at some of the more complicated parts of verbs so that you can
master English grammar. Any questions, of course, please send me a message if there's anything
you don't understand, I'm very happy to help
and I'll be waiting in the next video with
another area to review. See you there.
13. Adverbs Review: Welcome back. In this video, we're
going to look at adverbs. So this is a type of word that people often feel a
little bit scared off. We know what nouns, we know what adjectives
and verbs as well. But adverbs sometimes make people feel a
little bit worried, but don't worry, we're
going to do a review. So first of all,
adverbs of manner. What are adverbs of manner? First of all, they
describe the way are the manner that the verb
action is completed, how we do that verb, how that action is done? A general rule is that almost always we placed the
adverb after the verb. But if you want to show, you really want to emphasize how the verb should be completed. Then we'll put the adverb before the verb and we'll
see some examples shortly. But most of the time
the adverb will come later in the sentence. It could be straight
away after the verb, or it could be
several words later. And how do we form it? Most of the time, an adverb of manner will
be just adding the LY, the famous LY, but some adverbs of manner or irregular and where it was,
hate that word, right? Because it means that the adverbs don't follow
that normal rule. So some of them, we have
to remember how to do it. Alright? We can take
a look at some, some regular adverb
examples. We have. Bad, becomes badly,
careful becomes carefully. Easy becomes easily. Be careful of the
spelling there. And noisy, noisily. Quick becomes quickly
and beautiful. Beautifully. Alright, so those are some
examples of when it's easy. And you can check those ones for those spelling rules as well. And we can also take a look at some examples of
those sentences. I did very badly on my
last test the semester. Something useful with
adverbs is to always remember which verb
there talking about, where is the connection. So here badly is
connected to what? It's connected to do. Did I did very badly? The old tractor starts up
very noisily when it's cold, very kind of noise. I never thought I'd do a
tractor noise in a video. That's a new thing for me. Quick, I want to buy something quickly before the
store closes the doors. So by is the verb and
quickly is the adverb. But when we want
to add emphasis, as we mentioned before, Let's see some examples. Will you, please, will you carefully carried
this Vars downstairs? Alright? So we're giving an important vars to someone
and we're saying, Please be careful, carefully
carry it downstairs. Could you kindly
turn the music down? Alright, so that's like someone is next
door playing very, very loud music and you have
to be up early tomorrow. So you're saying Could
you kindly turned down? So it means you're doing
it in a more polite way. I will gently hint. Hint is like suggest. I will gently hint that it's
time for my brother to get a haircut because his
hair is a total mess. So I will gently hint
that now those were all regular adverbs and
we can take a look at some irregular ones as well. The first one, good. So what would the
adverb B of that? So good is the adjective. It we don't say do
something good or goodly, we say do it well. Then we've also got a list
of other very common ones. And the good news for you
is that they don't change. So here you go. Straight, is straight. Early as early, laters, late, hard, It's hard. Long is long and fast is fast. So that I can feel you go, oh, well that's a lot easier. Want to be careful, of course is good. And well, that one is something that many
people make a mistake on, particularly when
they're speaking. I think we remember that
from studying, right? So when we're writing, we don't make such. We don't so often
make a mistake, but when we're speaking, quite often will say,
I'll do that really good, should be, I'll do
that really well. And we can see some examples of those irregular adverbs
in some sentences. So I studied so hard. Now it's not so hardly. Hardly is a real word, but it means almost nothing. So I hardly ate. Anything, or I ate hardly anything means
I ate very little. So that's a very
different meaning. So be careful of that as
such a common mistake. If you say, I studied
hardly or I hardly studied, that has a totally
different meaning. It means I was very lazy. So I studied so hard for
my exams last semester. So it's no surprise I
did well, be careful, it's very dangerous to drive
fast on this road at night. Fastly, fast. Going to bed late every
night is a very bad habits. Harry Maguire didn't last
long as the captain of Majesty United and my
wife makes sure we arrive early for
our appointments. Now let's review
something I think a little bit more difficult, which is comparative
adverbs set. Comparative adverbs are used to compare two ways of
doing something. Alright, so one person's way on manner and another
person's way on that. So they usually formed with more or less and
also the word van. So let's see. I think a pretty easy
example to understand. My mother cooks more
frequently than my father. So the regular adverb
is frequently. And we've added the more and the van to make it comparative. And what is it talking about? Cooking cooks is the verb. And my father cooks less
frequently than my mother. On top of those
comparative adverbs, we can add superlative adverbs. So those are the ones where
we're going to be saying something is the most
or the least out of, usually out of three
or more options, just as we talked about
in the adjectives video. Okay? So we use it to talk about extremes and we use it with the most or the least,
set some examples. My mother cooks the
most frequently. And you can imagine
that there were talking about the whole family. So it could be like
mom and dad and me, and brother and sister
and aunt and uncle, more than two people, then we could say
the most frequently. And my father still very lazy, cooks the least frequently
out of the whole family. So those ones are
easy to understand, I think because It's
obviously an adverb, so they're frequently,
it has an LY, right? What about this one? This one is a little
bit more confusing. Let's take a look. After a heavy gym session, I usually feel the
most exhausted. Now. It's not exhausted li it, but in fact, exhausted
is talking about what? It's talking about. The verb, feel. It's describing
how feel is done. So I feel the most exhausted. So it still counts as an
adverb, a superlative adverb. And the opposite,
Jim partner usually feels the least tired
after a heavy workout. Again, we can imagine
that we're talking about a whole group of people who
are doing a workout together. And I feel the most exhausted. I'm really tired, my gym
partner, the least tired. Now let's take a look at some comparative and
superlative adverbs in action. And we're gonna do a
little, I'm gonna give you a question at the end of this, so pay attention carefully. Now, comparative
Mohammed usually gets to work earlier
than everyone else. And superlative Mohammed usually gets to work the earliest. Comparative I'm studying harder than anyone else for
my upcoming exams. And superlative, I'm
studying the hardest I've ever studied for
my upcoming exams. Now, here's my question for you. Do the pairs of sentences
there have the same meaning? I want you to pause the video and think
about that and think, do these pairs have the
same meaning as each other, the comparative and superlative? Or is there any difference? If there is a difference, where is it and what
is that difference? Pause. Have a try now. Okay, welcome back. Hopefully you caught that. The first sentence, the
first pair about Mohammed, those are the same meaning. Alright, so it's getting to work earlier than everyone else. So the two things
we're comparing our Mohammed and everyone else. And then the superlative is saying he gets to
work the earliest. So again. All of the people, He is the number one. So those two meanings
of the same, but the second one doesn't
have the same meaning. Why not? The second one? The comparative is, I'm studying
harder than anyone else. So we're comparing me and
all of the other people. But in the superlative, I'm studying the hardest
I've ever studied. Now, that doesn't mean that we're comparing
to other people. Who are we comparing to? We're comparing to
all of my past, The me from last year, from the year before,
from the year before. This is the number one. This is the best me. This is the me that
studying the hardest. So it doesn't include
other people. It only includes me. So those two have a
different meaning. The last type of adverbs
that we're going to look at are adverbs of frequency. So what are adverbs
of frequency? They describe how
often we do something, how often something gets done. It could be very frequently, it could be not at all, or it could be in-between. And in a minute, we'll see a bigger list of a
lot of examples. So how do we form that? So adverbs of
frequency are often placed before the
verb or the activity. And the time phrase is placed
at the end of the sentence, but it can be placed
at the beginning. So basically is it
can be anywhere. Let's see some examples to
see that I usually leave for work before 715
in the mornings. Okay. So the adverb
of frequency is usually and the time
is in the mornings. Crystal is rarely. That's the adverb,
late for work. Then finally, in the evenings. So this time, the
time is at the start. I often wind down by reading, wind down means to relax. Okay, we can take
a look at this, which I think is pretty cool. So we go from all the
time at the top to never. And we have lots of
different ones that we use. So we use always, almost always or nearly always, very often, usually,
often or frequently. And those ones, you can
see that they're ordered. So e.g. frequently is less than Always than we
have in the middle. Regularly sometimes, and then occasionally is a little
bit less than regular link. And then we have
rarely, hardly ever, almost never, completely,
Never the bottom. So that's a useful tool for
you to use to help remind you the different levels of these different adverbs and something that we
don't put on there. But you can also use precise
adverbs of frequency. So e.g. you could
say every Monday, every second weekend,
four times a week. So when you're
bringing a words like every in every day and also number the
number of times we do something ten times
a year every month. There's a lot of different
choices as well. So those ones are also
adverbs of frequency. Finally, we're gonna do a quiz, more like a writing
activity for you to see how confident you feel
about these adverbs now. So I want you to look at these verbs and also
these time phrases, and also take some
of the adverbs of frequency from
that last slide. And I want you to try and make, let's say, four sentences. You can mix and match all of the different verbs and
time phrases and adverbs. So pause the video and make
me four sentences now. Alright, let's take a
look at my examples. I regularly play squash
with one of my colleagues. We like going out for
dinner twice a month. My husband walks
the dog every day, usually in the late afternoon. I hardly ever make
pancakes these days. Okay. So there we go. That is a review of adverbs. Hopefully this was
useful for you. As always, any questions
you can send me a message and I'll be
waiting in the next video.
14. Active & Passive Review: Welcome back. Let's review the active and passive
voice because this is something that people can get a little bit confused about. What is the difference between the active
and the passive. So in the active voice, which we do call it
the verb form as well, the subject of the sentence is the thing that
performs the verb. It does the action. Alright, so it's a
pretty normal one. The active voice is like the first type of sentence
that you would learn, like back in high school or
even back in primary school. So it goes subject
and verb and object. And then in the passive voice, things change around the
object of the sentence. The thing receiving the action
turns into the subject. And we add an auxiliary verb, and we add the past participle, the verb, we'll see what
that means in a minute. So it would look like this. It's the subject, which was the object in the active voice, the auxiliary verb, and
the past participle. And we can see an example which I think makes
us all a lot clearer. So the active voice
we could say, we took the children to
the park this weekend. So the subject of that active voice sentence
is the verb is took, the past of take, and the object is the children. And then in the passive voice, and this one is in the past tense to make it
easy to understand, the children who are receiving the action
become the subject. We put them first
and then we say, we're, that's the
auxiliary verb. And then we say, taken, that's the past
participle of take. So the children were taken
to the park this weekend. And we could also add by us, but we don't need to add that. Something important to note
that many people get a little bit confused about because this is a
little bit confusing, is that when we're talking about the timeline of when
things happened, and we know that tense is
very important for verbs. Something to remember is that it doesn't
matter if we make the sentence in the active
voice or in the passive voice. The meaning of it is the same, the time stays the same. It's just the verb form, like take, took or taken. That changes the meaning. The situation doesn't change. Just the verb form changes. And this is true whether
we're talking in the past, in the present, in the future. And we can see that same
example that we just looked at. We took the children and
the children were taken. Now, you might look
at that and say, Well took and taken. Those are two different
types of the past tense. Sometimes they are. But when we're making a
passive voice sentence, the meaning of these
two is the same. It doesn't change. So what we're really
saying is both of them happened in the past. So that is the general idea of the active and the
passive voice. Now we're just gonna go
through and practice the different situations are the different ways
that you can make it. First of all, let's look at the past simple passive voice. So the construction is this. We say the subject. Then we say was
if it's one thing or were if it's plural,
or if it's you. And then we say the
past participle. So let's take a look
at an example first. Then I'm gonna give
you a challenge. So the active voice would be
the gardener cut the grass. And the passive voice,
the grass was cut. And we can say by the gardener, alright, now notice here that
the verb stays the same. So this is kind
of an easier one. So the regular past
of cut is cut. There's no cutted or caught. It's cut, it stays the same. And then the past participle. I always think of that
as the have done, have eaten, have taken. But this one is also cut. So this is a very simple one. So the grass was cut. Now for your challenge, Let's take a look at this. I've given you one sentence
in the active voice, and that one is a
thief, stole my wallet. And one sentence in
the passive voice, the floor was cleaned. What I want you to do is to turn that first
sentence into passive. And the second sentence
back into the active voice. So pause the video
and try that now. All right, Hopefully
you've had a try. Let's take a look. So the first one, my
wallet was stolen. So the past participle
of steel, today, I steal yesterday I stole it was stolen was stolen by a thief. And then the floor was cleaned, turns into we cleaned the floor. We don't know who it was. It might be I cleaned the floor. The cleaner clean the floor. My mom cleaned the floor. We don't know. But the important thing is
that we've put that now in the active voice because the, we is performing the action, the wheat is doing the action. The next version of the passive voice that
we need to take a look at is the past continuous. So let's take a look. But construction
looks like this. We have the subject
was or were being, and then we have the
past participle. Alright, so that's a lot
of, a lot of big words. Let's take a look at what
it really looks like. So the active voice
sentence would be, they were cutting the grass or someone was
cutting the grass. Okay? Remember the person is not
really important here. Then the passive voice becomes
the grass was being cut. The grasses, the subject now is receiving the action
of being cut. So it has become, the subject was being cut. And now that we've
seen an example, Let's see if you can
make it yourself. Can you perform this
action yourself? So the active voice sentence that I want you to
turn into passive is she was showing me how
to file my tax return. That's a pretty tough one. And then the passive voice
or Kate was being flown. So again, pause the
video and try to turn the active and passive and the passive interactive.
Have a try now. Alright, hopefully you've
had a trial at that. Let's take a look at the onset. So the first one, I was being shown how to file my tax return. So the important part
is the first part. I, the subject receiving
the action was being, then the past
participle is shown. Then the active sentence, a young child was flying a kite. Alright? So it could be any one
again, as we said before, it could be my mom
was flying a kite. Neighbor across the
street was flying a kite. The President was flying a kite. But the important thing was that we've changed it into
the active voice. The person at the start is
performing that action. The next form we
have to look at is the present simple passive. Now you might think that present simple would be the first one that
we would look at. It's actually not as common as say the past, simple passive. For whatever reason
we don't use it as commonly in the present
tense, we still use it. It's still definitely important to know, important to learn, but it's not as common as the past and also I
would think the future. So let's see the construction. We have the subject,
we have an is or are. So that's the verb to be
in the present tense. And then we simply have
the past participle. So we can see an example. Professor westward teaches
History at the University. And if we say that in
the passive voice, e.g. if someone asks us, who is the history teacher here, or how does the, how does the history
classes work exactly? Then you might answer, history is taught by Professor westward
at the university, or history is taught at the university by
Professor westward. So let's give you
your challenge now. So the active voice
sentence I'm giving you, many students use this textbook and your passive voice
to convert is new. Students are guided by
their academic advisors. Pause the video, try those now. Alright, welcome back. So let's take a look. This textbook is used by many students and
the active one, academic advisors guide
the new students. The next form of the passive
voice to look at is the present continuous with I-N-G? So the construction
is like this. We have the subject is or are. We add being, and then
the past participle, and then some details. An example, Professor
Westwood is teaching history. Now, you could say, whereas professor
westward at the moment. He is teaching history. And then the passive voice. History is being taught by
Professor westward now. Okay, so the subject is a history because it's
receiving the action is, is the, the form of two beat that we're
going to use here. Then being, and then the
past participle is taught. Your challenge. Active voice. The mechanic is fixing my car. This actually would be
a very common usage of the passive voice in the
present continuous form. Someone might ask you, where's your car? Something like that. And the furniture is being
destroyed by the kittens, by that little baby cats. So pause the video and write
me those two sentences now. Alright, welcome back. There we go. So my car is being
fixed by the mechanic, or you might say my car is
being fixed at the carriage, the garage, as Americans say, my car is being
fixed to the garage. And then the second, the second sentence in
the active voice is the kittens are
destroying the furniture. And I can imagine someone
like on the phone going now, the kittens are
destroying the furniture. Anyway. Those are the correct versions in the present continuous voice. Let's move on to
the future, simple. So we've talked about the past, we've got the present
and now the future. So we make it by
doing the subject will be and then the
past participle. Alright, so we hope
the detectives will catch the themes
in the passive. We would say, we hope the
thieves will be caught. You could say by the detectives, but probably it doesn't
really matter who. They could be caught
by traffic police. They could be caught by
Batman, could be anyone. But we hope that
thieves will be caught. So here's your challenge. Don't worry, they will
finish the report today. How do we say that
using the future simple passive and changing
it back into active, the outcome of your application will be sent to your e-mail. So pause the video and write
me those two sentences now. Alright, let's have a look. So the first one, don't worry, the report will be
finished today. So the report is, the subject will be then
finished is the past participle. And then the second one, the university will
send the outcome of your application
to your email. And you can see in that
one that it feels a little bit like sort of unnecessary. Because if you've applied
to the university, you know, it's the university who will send it back to you. So that's probably
why we would say that sentence more naturally
in the passive voice. Then the last one that
we have to look at is the future continuous passive. How do you form that one? You can't, it doesn't exist. So the passive voice
is not used in the future continuous
tense, alright? In any future perfect
continuous tenses either. So e.g. if we have the sentence, we will be spending a
lot of time together. There's no way to put that
in the passive voice. In anything that makes sense. Like a lot of time will
be being spent together. By us. It sounds really weird. Okay, so we don't need
to worry about this one. Another couple of examples. He will be studying
all day tomorrow. All of his studying tomorrow
will be done by him. Again, we can't do it. It doesn't exist. Mr. Simpson will be guiding
you through the course. Again, there's not really a version of that that we
can say that it's correct. So that is a review of the
active and passive voices. Makes sure that
if you're writing essays or you're
making a speech, you use a variety of both
of them to show that you've got good command of
English grammar, that you're very comfortable using active or using passive. Make sure you review this video if there's anything
you're not sure about. And of course you can
always send me a message and I'll be waiting as
always in the next video.
15. Verbs Part 1: In this section, we're going
to take a look at Verbs and in particular verb patterns. So the different
ways that we use different verbs in high
level English grammar. So let's get started. We're going to look
at base forms, infinitives and gerunds. Verbs can be expressed
in different forms. We have to know those
different forms because the different verb patterns
use different verb forms. So you can always
use, for example, the to do something in certain situations you
might need to use doing, or you might need to use do. And different pairs of Verbs
can have different rules. So in this set of videos, we're gonna be really
going deep and doing a lot of practice
and a lot of examples. So first of all, to be clear, some vocabulary. The base form is like the
normal verb. By itself. It doesn't have two, it doesn't have
English as just like the word do, Take, eat. That is the base form. The infinitive is when we have the base form with
two in front of it, to do, to eat, to go, and so on. The gerund is when we
add the ING to the verb, going, doing, eating, taking. And we can see an
example with enjoy. So we have the base
form is enjoy, the infinitive to enjoy and
the gerund is enjoying. Now we're going to take a
look at some infinitives. But first, the
important thing to know is that certain verbs
or pairs of Verbs, when we put them together, can only use the infinitive. Certain other ones can
only use the gerund. And we really have to learn and memorize which Verbs
use the infinitive, which use the gerund or
which use the base form. We have to remember those ones. There's no quick or
easy way to do it. We just have to remember them. And when we're using
the infinitive verbs, the Tense would never change. Alright, so whenever
gonna say two went or two played is always
two with the base form, the verb before it might change, that might change to the
past or to the future. But the infinitive verb itself
is never going to change. That's always going
to stay the same. Let's take a look
at some examples and we can see the
verb on the left. And then we see the
example sentence. So first of all, decide, we decided to leave. So they decided as
the first verb. And you can see that that
one is in the past tense, ed at the end. But then the to leave
is always going to stay in the infinitive
form. It's not. We decided to left is we decided to leave today
instead of tomorrow. Another one is hope. So. I'm hoping to pass my exams. I'm hoping to do something
or we could just say, I hope to pass. Both of those would be correct. Deserve he deserves
to retire early. He deserves to receive
a lot of praise. Appear she appeared
to know the answer. Maybe really she didn't, but she looked like she did. She appeared to know. Manage. How did you
manage to do that? Learn, I must learn to
do basic programming. Agree? Eventually they
agreed to disagree. That's a great
phrase by the way, we agree to disagree. It's when you're having an
argument with someone and you know that you're not
going to find a solution. So you say, okay, let's
just agree to disagree. We both accept that we can't change the
other person's mind. The last one scene, she seemed to hear the
question but didn't reply. So when we're using these
Verbs down the left, decide, hope,
deserve, and so on. We're gonna be using
the infinitive. After that if we want to use
those to Verbs in a row. Now let's do a little
bit of practice. Actually, it's not a little bit, It's a lot of practice of
using some different Verbs. So we're gonna give
you the main Verbs, and you can see those
ones in orange. And I want you to
make a sentence for each one that has an
infinitive verb afterwards. So here we go. We've
given you the first one Refuse, say no. So Adam refused to finish
his breakfast this morning. Alright, so you're going to take the main verb on the left. You're going to use that
one as your first verb, and you'll add an
infinitive verb afterwards. Alright, so refused to finish, or we could say he refused to play with
the other children. Alright. So you're gonna
do that for intend, fail, offer a range
plan, pretend and claim. You're going to pause
the video, try that. And then afterwards
we'll look at some possible examples of that. Pause, try and make
those sentences now. Alright, welcome back. Let's take a look so we
already know the refuse. Let's do intend I
hope you intend to study this weekend. I don't. Failing to plan is
planning to fail. That's a very common phrase
that people talk about. Offer migrant, offered to
bakers or batch of cupcakes. Arrange we've arranged
to pay for the surgery, a plan I plan to leave by
06:00 A.M. tomorrow morning. Pretend our Labrador puppy
pretends to bite the kids. I like it went dogs
do that when they go and pretend to buy you. Claim she claims
to speak Italian, but I have my doubts. So those are some
useful verbs that would always be followed
by the infinitive. But now let's take
a look at some that we follow with a gerund. And so remember the gerund is
the I-N-G form of the verb. So some main Verbs must
be followed by a gerund. And this can be the
case when we're talking about like a feeling or an attitude or your approach to something the way you think
about something. Not always, but that's
quite a common situation. And remember that just
like with infinitives, the gerund is not going
to change its form. There's no way renting or plating or anything like that is already in the form
that it will stay. So it's always gonna
be the base form, like go or like eat plus I-N-G, going, eating,
playing, and so on. Let's see some examples. Enjoy this is a
really common one. He enjoys surfing before work. Now, the reason that this whole
series of videos is quite important is that this is a common mistake
that people make. It very often hear people say he enjoys to surf or
he enjoys surf, but it should be
the gerund after he enjoys surfing, before work. That's the only
correct way to say it. Allow this company allows
working from home 24-seven. Consider the boss will consider
letting you leave early. Thank you very much,
boss. Finished. Did you finish doing
your homework? Now, just to reminder,
with these Verbs, we don't always have to
put a gerund after it. For example, you could say, Did you finish your homework? But if we do want to
put a verb after, it has to be the verb
in the gerund form. That's the important
thing to remember. Just so we're totally clear. Suggest, I suggest
practicing every day. Miss I really miss playing video games after
school. That's true. Discuss, they should
discuss raising the minimum wage and
risk if you don't study, you risk failing your exams. Those are some examples and now we can have a try ourselves. Again. We're gonna give you the table with the main verbs. And what I want you to do is
to pause the video and write example sentences where you put the main verb with
a gerund after it. So here we go, like and dislike. Our youngest daughter
dislikes swimming lessons, or you could just say
she dislikes swimming. Now, I want you to also make
sentences with deny, keep, avoid, appreciate,
delay, admit, and claim. In particular, the
verb that I've noticed people make a lot of mistakes on is that one of void. So let's avoid
making any mistakes. Alright, so sentence with the main verb
followed by a gerund. Pause the video, have a try now Alright, so let's take a
look at some examples. Now of course your
sentences could be about anything at all. But here are some
correct examples. So deny the criminal denied
breaking in last weekend. Keep is just keep trying. Avoid, Let's avoid
making mistakes. Let's avoid using too
many bright colors here. Appreciate, we really appreciate having so much time off delay. I'd like to delay
shipping by a week. Please admit they admitted
spying on user's private data. Not very good.
Claim. She claimed roasting was the
healthier option. I'm not sure what the
less healthy option was. Maybe deep frying, KFC
style. So there we go. We've used those Verbs as the main Verbs and we've
added gerunds afterwards. So that's a really
important thing to remember and to focus on. Now the next set of
Verbs that we're gonna look at are quite flexible. So these are Verbs
where you can use afterwards an infinitive or
a gerund with the same mean. So after some main
Verbs, not all, some, you can use an infinitive or a gerund without changing
the meaning of the sentence. Okay, so let's see
some examples. The first one is like, I like walking on the beach after work, or I like to walk on
the beach after work. Now, these two have
exactly the same meaning. There's no difference.
This is a very common one. People asked me, Well Francis, is it I like doing something or is it I
like to do something? And people everybody wants there to be just
one right answer. Actually, both of
them are correct. Both of them are
exactly the same. So it's nice and flexible.
The next one is begin. The writer began writing or
the writer began to write. Both of them, same meaning. Prefer, my partner prefers
exercising before dinner. My partner prefers to
exercise before dinner. Start when I start studying, I don't get distracted easily. Or when I start to study, I don't get distracted easily. Neither of those
are true for me. I get distracted very easily. Intend, the host intends
starting the ceremony now. The host intends to
start the ceremony now. Now, the last one, it technically is correct to say the host in Tense starting. So that's why we've included it. But much more common is the second one with the
infinitive to start. So I would recommend in that situation
with the verb intend, choose the infinitive,
both are correct, but the infinitive is
much more common with, with all of the rest of them. They're equally common. They're both totally fine. It's just a slightly
unusual form of Grammar to say the
host intends starting. It's just not very often
hurt, but it is correct. Now, you know what the
next thing to come as. You're going to make
your own sentences. So I want you to
make the sentences in either the infinitive
or the gerund, alright? Or if you want, you can do both. Both would be probably
the best way to practice, but at the very least, get yourself a mix through. Don't do. All infinitives
are all gerunds. Do two of 13 of
the other, or 5.5. So your main verbs are gonna
be love, hate, neglect, propose, and a verb
phrase can't stand. Pause the video and make
meet some sentences now. So let's take a look at
some possible answers. Love, I love eating ice cream on a sunny day or I love to eat
ice cream on a sunny day. I hate playing football
when it's so humid. Certainly should feel very
tired and very sweaty. Or I hate to play football. Neglect, he neglected
looking after his bicycle or he neglected
to look after his bicycle. Propose the committee
proposed zoning, the area or the committee proposed to zone
and can't stand. My sister can't
stop, by the way, can't stand means hate.
In case you're not clear. Can't stand hearing
loud music at night or my sister can't stand to
hear loud music at night. So those were all Verbs where if we use the
infinitive or the Jeran, the meaning stays the same. But we have other Verbs
where the meaning can change depending on whether we use the
infinitive or the gerund. So this is where it gets quite interesting and a
little bit tricky. So here's what I want you to do. I want you to take a
look at these sentences. We have got ten sentences, five pairs of sentences. And I want you To figure out what
is the difference in meaning between the pairs
of sentences, okay? So both of them are
grammatically correct. Everything is
grammatically correct. But the difference in
the meaning of the infinitive and the gerund is
what you have to figure out. So let's quickly
read through them. We have remember did you
remember to meet him after work? Do you remember meeting him? What's the difference
in meaning? Stop. I stopped to see
how the baby is doing. I stopped seeing how
the babies do it. Try the Dr. tried to warn you or the Dr. tried
warning you, forget. Elizabeth forgot to drop
off the files yesterday. Elizabeth forgot dropping off the files yesterday, and quit. Michael quipped to work here. Michael quit working here. So pause the video, have a think about it, see if you can explain. Let's say in other words,
using other words, can you explain the meaning of these two sentences for
each of the five Verbs? Pause, figure it out now. So welcome back. I've taken my face off. Hopefully you can live without my face for a few
minutes while we look at this quite
complicated set of answers. So let's take a look
at some main verbs. As we know, we can use
an infinitive or gerund, but it changes the
meaning of the sentence. So with remember the first one, did you remember to meet him? It means you had a plan to meet him after work and
your friend is checking. Did you follow your plan? But do you remember meeting him means your thinking
back in your memory, What was the first time
that you met that person? Maybe it was ten years ago. Maybe it was a month ago,
something like that. Stop. I stopped to see
with the infinitive means, I visited the baby. I stopped to see the baby, but I stopped seeing with
the gerund means that you have stocked your habit
of checking on the baby. Try the Dr. tried to warn you. So the Dr. attempted
to tell you, but maybe like he couldn't find you or
something like that. Or maybe it was
trying to call you on the phone and your phone was switched off,
something like that. And the Dr. tried warning you. That means that you
wouldn't listen to the Dr. Elizabeth forgot to
drop off the files means that she went
out of her mind. She didn't deliver
them, but she forgot. Dropping off means that she
doesn't remember doing it. But actually she really
did drop off those files. So it's just that
she's she's got a bad short-term
memory, but she's good. She's good at her job. She really did her job and quit. Michael quit to work here. Now that this is the
most interesting one, quit to work here. That means that he left his old job and
started working here. And Michael quit working here. He has stopped working here. So he's quit this job. So quit to work. He quit his old job so
that he could work here. And quit working here
means he quits this job
16. Verbs Part 2: Let's move on now and talk
about when we Include the object in one
of our sentences. So when we have a verb, the object and the infinitive. So this is another Advanced
verb pattern that we can use. So have a look at this table. I want you to help something, to help clean, to help
teach, to help pay. The I is the subject, the main verb is want, but then we have the object, and then we have the
infinitive verb. Alright, so the main verb and the infinitive
are separated. And another one, Let's ask
grand grandma to bake cookies. So the main verb, ask and the infinitive
to bake are separated. They have the object
in the middle. And which Verbs can we use here? So there's a long
list that we have. But we have things like advise, allow, ask, cause, convince, enable, encourage, all
the way down there two, teach tail and worn. So you can take a look at our additional materials
to get this full list. You can also check
our website for this full list and you
can learn it by yourself. But this is a
pretty good list to be able to remember and
to follow this pattern. Now that we know how we
can use that object, Let's do a little
bit of practice. So we're going to write some practice sentences
using the pattern of verb, main verb, that is
Object and infinitive. So we've got an
example with aloud, will your mum allow you to stay? So allow is the main verb, you as the object and the
infinitive is to stay. So pause the video and try to
make me sentences with ask, cause, mean, help,
persuade, remind, and take. Pause. Have a try now. Alright, welcome back. Let's take a look at
some possible examples. So tell James that he needs
to stop bullying his sister. Alright, cause
smoking will cause your father to develop asthma. I didn't mean to hurt her. We would just plain, please help your grandmother to
get up the stairs. Can you persuade the
kids to eat their food? I already reminded dad
to take his medicine and they've taken us to court
because of that accident. Now that we've looked at the
verb object and infinitive, what do you think might be next? What's the other choice? It is, of course, verb and
Object and gerund, I-N-G. So how do we use this one? It would be like this example. I want is the main verb. Everyone is the object, helping is the gerund. Then whatever the
extra details are, in this case, it's
the new intern. I want everyone helping
the new intern. Another one, I see Richard
becoming the captain. Alright, so see main verb and the gerund is become,
turns into becoming. Which Verbs can we use? So we've got things like
dislike, like hate, imagine, involve, keep all the way
down to stop, sea and spend. And we can do a little bit
of practice of this as well. Remember, I want you to make
a sentence with the verb, object and gerund pattern. The first one is like, I'll give you our example. My boss likes me contributing
so much in meetings, likes me giving suggestions and opinions and
things like that. Now, I want you
to make sentences width, keep, mind, prevent, risk, stop, spend, or spends, and imagine. Pause the video. Have a try now. Alright, welcome back. Let's take a little look. Key, can you keep the engine
running while you wait? Keep is the main verb. Running is the gerund mind. I don't mind you at
Jeanine house tonight. Mind is the main verb, you as the object. And staying the gerund prevent. New tax laws prevent us. And we could say from or we didn't need to.
It's optional. Preventers from doing or
preventers doing that. Risk. Don't risk the investor's
abandoning the project. Stop. You should stop the
kids shouting so loudly. Spend, we spend every
evening enjoying the sunset. And finally, imagine, imagine us graduating with Top Marks. And here's an important thing. Look at that last sentence. The blue, the object is us. And remember, when we
reviewed Pronouns, we talked about the situations
when we use the subject. So if it was the subject, it would be wheat. And the situations when we
use the object, this one, we know that the pattern is the main verb object
and the gerund. So it's not imagine
we graduating, it should be imagined
us graduating. The next pattern we're
going to look at is when we have verb and Preposition and gerund. So what do we mean by this? So this is verb pattern. When we use a preposition
in the middle, and quite often it's
part of a phrasal verb. And we use a gerund after it, because you can't use the
infinitive after a preposition. Because it already has a
preposition, it has two. That's a lot of words. Let me give you some
examples so it's clearer. Look at the first one, adapt to. Now if you are giving the
infinitive afterwards, we would say adapt
to, to do something. And that would just
sound crazy to two. We can't have that in English. So it would be adapt
to doing something. So I had to adapt to living
in a big city. Alright? And you can see that all of
them there down the left. All of our main Verbs are adverb and Prepositions
are phrasal verbs. It's two words together, and the second one
is a preposition. So apologize for something, the neighbors son apologized
for breaking our window. So breaking is the gerund
approve of we don't really approve of lesly
staying out late. So we've got an object in
the middle there as well. Ask about did you
remember to ask about getting a taxi from there? No, I didn't. I forgot about it. Decide on they haven't decided on having a
theme for the party yet. Give up. After giving up, smoking, my lungs
feels so much better. Look forward to, I look forward
to hearing back from you. That's a very common phrase
to use in a business e-mail. Forgive for something we
forgave and then the object, the neighbor's son, for breaking our window.
So there we go. Those are some examples
of Verbs where we use a preposition and then
we have to use a gerund. And you might be thinking
right now, well, how do I know which is
the right preposition? There's so many different
options. It's true. One of the difficulties
with getting to very Advanced English grammar is that Prepositions can to
make their own rules. They're very
idiomatic, so you have to learn each of
them individually. And you can do that by reviewing all of the material that we
talk about in this course. And also just by noting them as you're
doing your reading. If you read newspapers or books, you'll gradually get
more and more of a feeling for which are
the correct Prepositions, in which situation,
and when you're, when you're starting
your reading, you can try to actively
look at them and say, if you're reading Harry
Potter for example, Harry Potter apologized for
treating Ron very badly. And you can, in your
brand you can get apologize for doing that. And that's a really good way to learn by doing something
interesting, like reading. Something that we need
to have a quick look at, is something I've
mentioned a couple of times, phrasal verbs. So this again is when
we have a verb and the preposition and
phrasal verbs are very, very common, that incredibly
common in English, in formal and informal language, they're extremely useful. So there are an essential
part of learning English. I can't say how
important they are. They're extremely important. Many people have
the idea of just learning one word, one word. But even if you take the
verb, take, for example, there's so many different
phrasal verbs that use take, take out, take in,
take up, takeoff. Those are just four. So
there's lots and lots of different phrasal verbs that have different
meanings and they are super important part
of learning English. Let's take a look at just a
few we have come up with. We need to come up
with a new idea that's like think of a new idea. Hangout, suspend time together. Do you want to hang
out this weekend? Lookout for that means like you're trying
to find something, you're keeping an eye out. There's another
phrase, Let's look out for good Black Friday
specials this year. Workout, exercise. I work out at the gym. Go over can we go
over a few details? That means check again. Hold on. Wait, hold on a minute. Keep on. Keep on
doing something. So continue doing something. Keep on practicing. If you want to improve
faster and catch up, that means to talk and find out someone's news and tell them your news if you haven't
seen them for awhile. And that last one is
a perfect example. Because just those two words, catch-up includes
so much feeling and so much information. Let's catch up. That means like it has so
much background to the, those two little words. And that's why phrasal verbs are super important in English. And the good news is that coming in a really
special course, which is our Advanced
English fluency course. You can learn all about the most common phrasal
verbs in English and really be able to
use those confidently. Be able to use them in the
right place at the right time. So watch out for that cause. Something important to note just while we're talking about phrasal verbs is the
tense of phrasal verbs. So many people get
confused about this because it's verb
and a preposition. And what happens if
you want to say it in the past or in the continuous? Let's take a quick
look as a reminder. So they can be used
in different tensors. And let's take a look at
a few and you tell me if you can figure out which Tense. These different examples are. I meet up with Zoe once a week. What Tenses that? I met up
with Zoe the other day? I am meeting up
with Zoe now that one's the present
continuous tense, and I will meet up
with Zoe later. So what do you think? Which Tense is which? Let's take a quick
look. I meet up. Is the present simple, so it's just the normal form, the past I met up. So that's the Past, simple. So notice that the
AP doesn't change. It's just the verb in our
phrasal verb, met up. I met up with Zoe, and I am meeting
up with Zoe is the present continuous as we saw. And finally, I will meet up, is the future simple? So that is a look at some
advanced verb patterns. Remember, you can get all of this information in our
additional materials. You can find that
on our website. And I hope you found
it very useful. Make sure to review. Because as I've said
several times already, it's really important
to remember which Verbs follow which rule. So we avoid making any mistakes. We make sure our English grammar is correct and
accurate as possible. So, thank you very
much for watching. I'll be waiting for
you with all kinds of different exciting
information in the next video. See you then
17. Quantities Part 1: Welcome back. In this
series of videos, we're going to talk
about Quantities. That's like how much
of something we have. There are a lot of cool grammar problems that
people have related to this. So we're going to try and
clean them up and give you lots of really good
phrases to use and good sentence structures
so that you are totally competent and totally accurate
with your English grammar. So we're gonna talk first
about countable nouns. So the first two that
we're talking about are the words enough and too many. Just so you remember, countable nouns are those
ones where we can count them, like look, one apple, one person, things like that. Uncountable nouns
we'll look at later. Those are things
like rice or meat, or experience things like that. Things where it's
harder to count them. But first counter, so we
can use these two phrases, enough and too many with
Quantities of countable nouns. Let's take a look
at some examples. The first one is too many. We have too many employees
wanting to take leave 16-20 s of December.
What does that mean? You can see the
meaning on the right. The business can't allow that
number of employees to take leave at the same time because no one will be there
to run the business. So it's too many,
it's a bad thing. We have enough employees to cover for those who
will be taking leave. Now this is kinda the
opposite meaning. This means the business will be fine if this number of
employees take leave. Alright? Take leave, by the
way, if you don't know, that means like
to go on vacation or to not work for a few days. The next one, we don't
have enough employees to cover for you if you take
leave during that period. So we don't have enough. It means you can't have that number taking leave.
So that's a bad thing. And there are not enough. Notice we don't have
or there are not. And then we add enough
enough support staff to cover for those taking
leave in December. Again, the business can't
allow this number of employees to leave
at the same time. Now given that this is a
master English grammar course, you're probably thinking
enough and too many. That's, that's easy. But we can also add modifiers, and this is something that
we very often do in English. We add bits to change the meaning of those
words in nothing too many. So we've got a few examples. We've got just quite
simply and more than they can emphasize the quantity or they
can change the feeling. What we're saying.
Let's take a look. The first example. I'm sorry, but you can't bring any
more people that are simply too many people coming to the party already,
simply too many. Later we'll also see
simply too much, but here it's
countable, is people. So it's simply too many people. And what are we saying?
In a polite way? We're saying the party is full, there's no more space. The next one, we have just enough space
for Daniela to come. Just enough. That means there's a
small amount of space, but that space is
enough for Daniella. It's almost no space,
but still enough. Then we have more than enough
space for Daniela to come. Now this uses enough, but the feeling is
very different. It means there's
lots of extra space. Just enough, a
little bit of space, more than enough,
lots of extra space. Then finally, unfortunately
that isn't quite enough. Isn't quite enough or aren't quite enough space for Stephanie to bring her
bicycle in the car. So there isn't enough space, that means that
there's not enough that the bike can't come. So those are some
nice collocations, phrases that we often use with
enough and with too many, simply too many, just enough, more than enough and isn't
or aren't quite enough. The next one is to talk about, are these few and a few. Now, you might be looking
at those and saying, well, that's the same thing. But actually this is a
point of some confusion. English, because these ones have two contradictory meanings. They mean the opposite
of each other. And a few can also be used
as a synonym for not many. So few has the
meaning of not many, of few doesn't
have that meaning. We have to be careful. Let's take a look. There are few wild animals
left in this area. Now that means there are not many wild animals still
living in this area. So we're really focusing
on, It's not many. It's a small number. But the next one, there are a few wild animals
left in this area. There are not many, the number is not very big, but it's more than the
example where we say few. So if we say just few
is a very small number. A few is not a big number, but it has the feeling of more. It also has the feeling of some. So we're not focusing
on it being a problem. If we say a few, if we say few, we're giving the
feeling, it's a problem. A few is like it's not a lot, but it's not something
to worry about either. And then the last one, few
are willing to work overtime unless there is a strong
insensitive to do so. Incentive is like, like
something that motivates you, like some more money or
something like that. So again, this
means there are not many people who are willing to work overtime unless they
get a financial incentive. Okay? So the important
thing to remember is that few gets the feeling of not many of you is more like
the feeling of some. You do have to be careful
with this because I remember when I was
living in China, I went to a meeting and
the person who organized the meeting was like the
assistant of the bus. It was the bosses assistant. And he wrote everyone
an email in English. And what he wanted to say was, the boss will be saying some interesting things
in this meeting, so we should all attend. But he made a bad choice. He said, I'm the boss will be saying few things of interests. What he wanted to say was a few things like some
things of interest, but what it actually said
was few things of interests. So really, really he was saying, the bus will be saying not
many interesting things. The boss will just be talking in a boring, unimportant way. Please still come.
So you have to be very careful
with your language. Alright, remember the difference
between a few and a few? And to add an extra
layer of complication, we also have quite a few. Quite a few gives the feeling of many or at least several. Or it can even be a lot. And it depends on how
you say At the tone of your voice and also kind
of who you're talking to. So we've got two examples here. The first one, there are quite a few wild animals
left in this area. So it means there are many, or maybe several wild
animals in this area. Okay, So this is, if we imagine the progression of how many it would be, few. A few, quite a few. So each one gets a bit bigger. But then number two is for people who
like who like beers, judging by your hangover, I'm guessing you've had quite
a few drinks last night. So what we're saying
is you had a lot. We're in a slightly polite or slightly
indirect way saying, you drunk a lot of
beers last night?
18. Quantities Part 2: Next we're going to talk
about fewer and less. Now, just before I reveal
how we use these ones, what do you think
is the difference between fewer and
less? Would you know? If I didn't tell you,
this is something that even native speakers
make a mistake. Width. If you, if you're
a Game of Thrones fan. In season two, they make a joke about this with Stan iceberg. And I'll tell you very quickly, status bar Appian
is talking to his, his hand, the hand of the king. And the hand of the king says, we have less soldiers
than the other side. And standard says, actually
it's fewer soldiers. Maybe that gives you a clue. So the difference is that
fewer is talking about countable nouns and less is
talking about uncountable. So when it was people, soldiers, it shouldn't
be less soldiers. It's fewer soldiers because
we can count those soldiers. And of course both of them
have the same meaning really, which is less than in the past or less
than something else. Okay? If we're comparing
an example, fewer people. So countable, one person, two people are reading
newspapers these days because of social
media apps, Alright? And it means the number
of people is declining. It's getting lower due
to unsustainable demand. There are fewer and fewer fish. Now be careful. You
might think, well, it's not fishes. It's just fish. But fish is one of
those strange words that doesn't have a plural form. It doesn't have like
an S at the end, so don't get confused. It's still countable.
We can still say, look, one fish or I've got three
fish here in my house. There are ten fish. We
can still count them. So fewer and fewer fish left
in the ocean every year. There won't be any left by
the end of the century. Some great language
in the meaning, the number of fish in the ocean is being irresponsibly depleted. Irresponsibly is like not
responsible, like dangerous. And then Depleted means
to be less and less. Then we go on to the less. So the first one I think is
a pretty clear example that is less demand for
newspapers these days. So demand is this kind of abstract idea of
what people want. So we can't say, Look, there is one demand or
one piece of demand. It's hard to count. So this one is uncountable,
so we use less. But the next one,
the fourth one, is pretty complicated because it doesn't really
look like this, some kind of noun there. But we have to think of the action of people
reading as being our noun and that's a hard
thing to count as well, that would be uncountable. So again, we're going to
say people are reading less and less nowadays. So that is sort of a
quick review and dive into some of those
different words and the differences
between them. The key thing is to
remember those differences. And let's see if you can
remember those differences. While we do our quiz, you're going to choose
the right option for all of these sentences. We'll quickly look at
the first one together. There are too many or
too much or more than enough complaints
about late deliveries. So you have to think about
not just the grammar, but also the logic of the sentence and choose
the right option. We've got quite a few
more sentences here. Alright, so pause the video, go through and try to choose the correct options.
Have a try now. So welcome back. Let's take a look
at some answers. The first one, there are too many complaints
about late deliveries, so complaint is countable, one complaint, ten
complaints and so on. So it's too many. A few complaints are acceptable, but this many complaints will
not be tolerated next year. Tolerate it means like we won't take it, we
won't accept it. Things will happen if there
are this many complaints. So a few is like some, but a small some, not hundreds and
hundreds, just a few. The number of complaints
is simply too high. Alright, so what we're saying
there again is that it's, it's that emphasis
of it's too high. We're strongly saying
it's just too high, it's simply too high. The next one, we've
been receiving quite a few complaints
about delivery issues. So that's saying a lot. Are several complaints.
Do you need more? No, this is more than enough. Thank you. So that's
like if you at someone's house and they're
they've given you dinner? And they're trying
to give you a bit more as people often do. Usually when people
offer me more food, I, I tend to say yes, I'm not very good at
turning down food. Anyway. If you're more
responsible than me, you could say no, this is
more than enough. Thank you. So you're saying like, I have enough and even more than enough so I don't need anymore. But thank you very
much. And that's a pretty common phrase. You can learn that one.
How many are left? Not a lot. There should be
just enough for this order. So let's say that the order
is ten and we have 11 or 12. That's the feeling
that we're getting. Please. Can you get me a few
Soviets from the counter? Soviet is like the paper
thing that you use to wipe your mouth or wipe
your hands or something. And we can count those. So it would be a few. And it doesn't mean like
if we said few here, can you get me few? It feels like get me not many. Which would be a
strange thing to say. Here we're asking for maybe
three or four or five. Finally, there are quite a few new housing
projects planned. So that's feeling
like a lot yet. But somehow it's not
enough to meet the demand. Perhaps there are simply too
many people for the area. So we've talked a
little bit about countable nouns and let's
look at uncountable noun. So how do we use enough and too much with uncountable nouns? Let's take a look at the
table and remember as well, we can use those modifiers just quite simply more than
would these ones as well. Simply too much. Just too much, and
things like that. Just enough of course. First example, don't add more. There's too much sugar
in this recipe already. Okay, So the recipe doesn't need more sugar and maybe it could, it could use less sugar. There's already a lot. The next one, they will have enough money in case
of an emergency, so they don't need more
money for emergencies. They're not particularly rich. But if there's an emergency, they will be okay. We don't have enough time, enough time to stop
for breakfast. Alright, so you can notice that enough we can use with
both countable and uncountable because time is
a classic uncountable noun. Okay, so we don't have
enough time to stop for breakfast means we would need more time if we wanted to stop. We can't stop for breakfast. So you'll have to be hungry. There isn't enough
of an incentive. And that's a good phrase. There isn't enough of something. And we say a noun, a reason, there isn't enough of a
reason or a motivation, or here, an incentive
for people to stop working from home and
return to the office. So another great
phrase as our meaning, the benefits of working
from home outweigh, or they're more or
heavier or stronger than the benefits of
returning to the office. Now previously we talked
about few and a few. And we can also look
at little and alittle, which kind of have the
same relationship there, the opposite meaning
of each other. And they are a senate. Well, the little is a
synonym for not much. A little is a synonym for
some. Let's take a look. I have little money left
until the end of the month. I won't be able to
join you tonight. So it means I don't have enough. So little money is not enough
money or not much money. But I have a little money left. What time should
I joined tonight? It means I don't
have a lot of money, but I have some I have
enough for tonight. And then we can do little to improve the financial
situation this quarter. Or there is little we can do to improve the
financial situation. So there's not much
that we can do. We don't have many
options to take action. We're powerless
19. Quantities Part 3: The next set of phrases
to look at these three, more than, fewer
than and less than. More than can be used with
countable or uncountable noun. So that one's pretty flexible. Fewer than is used with usually the number
of people or things. And we'll see in a minute It's animals as one
of those things. And less than is used with
amounts of something, distances, money, and time. And I think that's a pretty
good thing to remember. Amounts, distances,
money, and time. That's a lot of the
situations in which we would use less than
Let's see some examples. More than first of all, before he stepped down, Jeff Bezos was increasing
his net worth. That's like how much
money he has by more than $200 million per day. Now the countable
noun there is dollar. We can definitely count dollars. That's more than enough money
for an entire lifetime. And here money is uncountable. You don't say two monies. You might say a lot of money, not enough money,
not much money, but you can't say monies. So more than is with
countable and uncountable, fewer than we know it's with
people and it's also with, here is with animals. There are fewer than 13,000
tigers left in the world. And fewer than 5,000 of them are still living in the wild. Tigers is are countable
noun that then less than the new train ticket in Germany will set you back. That means it will cost you
less than €10, less than €10. And the next petrol station
is less than 30 km away. So we should have enough
petrol to get there. So again, with both of those, it wouldn't be few of them. It would be less than. Let's do another
quiz and see how well you're understanding
all of this material. So again, you're going to
choose the right option. Let me show you all
of our sentences, quite a lot of them there, and a football
sentence to finish. Pause, and choose
the right option. Now, let's take a look. So the candidate
who just finished his interview has
less experience, less experienced because less is usually used with uncountable. So less experienced than
the first candidate. Very few people. Very few people. So not many people
actually want this job. I left my purse at home. Do you have enough
for both of us? Yes. I brought a little extra
in case of emergencies. So it means I have some extra, some extra a little is some, there is simply too
much homelessness in the United States. So homelessness is
an abstract noun. It's an idea. So
we can't count it. So this one is too much. If you wanted to say
homeless people, you would say there are simply
too many homeless people. In the United States. There
is also too much crime. Crime, again, uncountable. Diverting public funds to
policing will help a little. So it won't be a great help, but it will be some help. But the real problem is having not enough affordable housing. Then the next one, sorry, I'm late. No problem. There are still a
few seats left. So there's still some, not many, but some seats left. There's enough specs. Hurry up. We only have a little time left. So it's not a lot of time, but it's not no time. It's a little time and time. Again, uncountable. Final one. Liverpool has fewer supporters than
Manchester United. Now, you might have looked
at the has and thought, shouldn't that be have? This really depends. It's a Grammar question
that people argue about is like a country or a football
team or an organization. Is it one thing? Or is it lots of many things? Some people would
say Liverpool have, think about Liverpool as they, and other people would
say Liverpool has, think about Liverpool as a team. Really, it depends on you. Both ideas are correct, but supporters are
definitely countable, so it should be fewer. Those are countable
and uncountable nouns. Now let's look at
approximations. So approximations,
what are they? They are when we don't
know the exact number, the exact or definite quantity. But we have, as a general idea, we say it's more or
less that number, or it's more or less deaths. We don't know exactly, but we have a general idea. We call those approximations. Let's take a look at the table. First of all, we have
amount on the left, and then we have example,
and then we have the meeting The first one is majority. The majority of sales came
from the European market. So majority means,
it can mean most of, technically, it means
more than half. So anything from like 50 per
cent up is the majority. But quite often when we say
the majority of something, we're saying most of it. Okay? So the majority of sales, most of the sales
came from Europe. Vast majority is the next one. The vast majority
were from France, and that's almost all. So I would say vast majority
is probably 75% or higher. Vast means very big. So the big majority, minority is less than half. So sales in Africa
represent the minority of total sales, less than half. Anything from 50 down is the
minority, small minority? Or we can use other words
like tiny minority. That means, I would say
less than 25 per cent. So the smallest minority
came from Nigeria. Alright? And that means out
of all of the African sales, the smallest one
was from Nigeria. And some can be
very, very general. I mean, that's just a
very easy one to use. In some cases we
don't have any data, so we don't know about how many countries
we have no data. It's very vague. Some could be like three, or it could be 5 million. It's incredibly wide. So if you're not sure, you can always just use some. Approximations are also useful
when we're talking about things like data
statistics or proportions. Like if you are giving a speech and you have to
talk about some data, we can use some phrases here. So let's take a look. We
have approximately or about, or roughly, they all
have the same meaning. It means maybe a little bit
less or a little bit more, but around this number. So approximately half of
Belgium speaks Dutch, while the other
half speaks French. The two groups are split roughly in two equal
parts of the country. So both of those mean around 50 per cent could be down to maybe 45 or up
to possibly 55, but it's around half. The next one's almost all. I would say that's
probably 85% or higher, maybe 90 per cent or higher. And almost no, or almost none, which is like 15% or lower, I would say that's 1515, not 50. So almost all of Europe speaks English as a second
or third language. There are almost no
speakers of Latin anymore. Or you could say, almost none of the people in
Europe speak Latin. Well over and well under. Well over is like if
we imagine we have 50, well over would be
probably 60 or higher. Well, under is the same. So it's not just a little bit
over or a little bit under. It's a big distance between, well, under 50 might
be 40 or lower. That are well over 1.1
billion English speakers. Now there we can imagine
it would be maybe 1.13. So something that
isn't to one point to it's not up to the next level because then
we would say 1.2 billion. But it's much more
than just 1.1. So it could be 1.131, 0.14, something like that. And then our revenue was
well under the target. So at least I would say at least 20 per cent
under the target. It wasn't a little bit
under it was well, under a long way
under the final ones, just over and just under the opposite feeling of
well over and well under. We went just over the
budget last year, maybe 2% or something. The number of
Mandarin speakers is just under the number
of English speakers. So it could be like if English
speakers is 1.1 billion, the number of Mandarin speakers
could be 1.07 billion. Pretty close, only just under
20. Quantities Part 4: We can also use
grammar to emphasize certain amounts to give an extra feeling when we're
talking about numbers. So we can emphasize
certain amounts, especially those that are surprising or exciting
or something like that. These are very common
in marketing and sales. So if you're in marketing and
sales, pay attention now. The first two are as
much as or as high as. And we're saying
like, we're giving our biggest number here and saying that
it's very exciting. So get as much as 75%
off if you order today. So it's saying like, Oh, 75 per cent, a very big number. Be excited, get as much
as 75 per cent off. That means a discount by
before midnight and get discounts as high as 50
pounds per customer. Again, we're saying that
is the most high you could get and we're giving
it an exciting feeling. The next one, as little
as or as low as. So again, this is the
same kind of thing. But when it's a low number, like the prices are
going very low. It took as little as 2 min for the FIFA World Cup
tickets to be sold out. So it was very low. And we're showing this
in a very excited way. For today, only get
prices as low as ¥5. Alright, so it's an
exciting opportunity, save money, and so on. As many as, or as few as, as many as 20
million tickets were requested for the Led Zeppelin
reunion concert in 2007, which is currently
the world record. And at sometimes
there are as few as for students taking
Latin that university. Those are some words and phrases we can use
for approximations. Let's do a quiz. I
want you to choose the right option for
each of these sentences. Let's take a little
look. There we go, a full page of sentences
for you to have a triad. Take your time. Think
about the logic of it. Think about the feeling, the context, the
background. Pause. Have a try now. Okay, let's take a look. So the first one, the
report can be written in as little as a few hours, as little as we're
saying is very low. It can be done quite quickly. On Black Friday. Discounts can be as high as 80 per cent off.
Very exciting. Good time to buy.
On Cyber Monday, the discount can be as much as $200 off your order. Alright? So think about the
difference there. So $200 off. So you're saving $200. That's why it's as much as, and the 80 per cent off is
saying what the discount is, what the reduction in price is. So that's as high as roughly 56 per cent
of Germans can speak English at an upper
intermediate level. This figure represents
a majority that is just over half the total
German population. So you can see there 56, we're saying it's
just over half. It's not well over half
is just over half. The next one. As little as 34,000 people live
in San Marino. Now, we didn't give you
the option of as few ads. That would also be correct. So we can have got two choices, but it's not as low
as it should be, as few or as little. This is well below the average population
in European countries. Unemployment in
Spain and Italy has. Now why is it has and not have? Think about what the has
or have is connected to. It's not connected
to Spain and Italy. It's connected to unemployment, which is one thing, one idea. Okay, So it has, its the third person
singular, just one thing. Unemployment has
been as high as 35%. In the past decade. The weather in Cape Town can
go from hot summer day to cold winter morning in as little as half an hour because we're
talking about time. So that's the grammar side, but let's also take a look and help you if you
are going to make a speech or write a report about some data,
take a look at this graph. So what we want to
do is to choose the most appropriate description of the pie charts
that we can see. We can see there's
four parts to it. Does the private
car, which is blue, black is public train, gray as public bus and
walking or cycling is yellow. Alright, so let me give
you some descriptions. And I want you to
think which one is most correct for describing
this graph, Let's read them. The majority of people
travel by private car. The vast majority of people
travel by private car. A small majority of people
travel by private car. About half the population prefers traveling by private car Now, grammatically, all
four of those are correct. But it, this is about
the meaning now, which is the correct
meaning. What do you think? Take a second to think about it and I'll give you the answer. So it would be number two. So vast is the important word, vast majority because
it's look at 75%. So we know that vast
has that big feeling. The other ones are small. Majority would be
just over half. Majority would be somewhere like really anywhere from
about 75 back to 50.5, the population would
be, would be half. So that one's pretty easy. We can take a look at
another one as well. Again, we want to choose the most appropriate
description, the most accurate description. So blue is working from home, and black is working
in the office. And it's like what
people prefer. So is it number one? Almost everyone prefers
working in the office. Majority of people prefer
working from home. Almost everyone prefers
working from home. Or over half the population
prefers working from home. Which one would be
the correct one? Have a think about
it. I'll give you just a couple of seconds.
What would it be? It would be, of course, number three, almost everyone,
because look at that. What is that like? 90 per cent. And so we need a strong feeling. It's, it could be
the vast majority. But almost everyone is, like we talked about, probably 90 per cent or higher. And that's the best choice here. And then the final
one is this one. This is about if customer
service is important or not. So we have got yellow, which is not very important. We've got gray, which
is somewhat important. Blue is very important, and black is just important. Okay, so let's take
a look at our four, well over half said customer
service is very important. A vast majority said customer
service is very important. As many as half said customer
service is very important. Or just over half said customer service
is very important. This is a pretty
tough one. I think. We're looking at the blue one
just to give you some help. But you know that
already, right? That's that's too easy. I
don't need to tell you that. So which one would
be the most correct? If we're talking
about that blue? It would be the last
one, just over half. So let's see why the
other ones are not right. Well over half, remember
is 60% or more. So this one is not that
this might be what? 53, 54%, a vast majority, definitely not that would
be 75 per cent or higher. As many as half. As many as half means like
when not quite sure how many, but it would be 50 or less. So as many as half
might be something like 48, 49, maybe 50. But it wouldn't be more. Okay. So if we say
as many as half, it can't go to more than half, then we have to
change the phrase. So just over half
is the correct one. So that is all about Quantities. I hope you've found this video
about Quantities useful. Of course, as always, please send me a
message if there's anything that you
don't understand, any concerns that
you have and I'll be waiting for you with another video next
time. See you there?
21. Perfect Tense Part 1: Let's talk about the
Perfect Tense now. So there's actually
several perfect tenses and they're very important for getting to that next level, to that Advanced master
level of English grammar. So let's take a little look. First of all, the
present perfect simple. Alright, so what is the
present perfect simple? Well, as the name of
the Tense first of all. But we use it when we
want to talk about events that happened
in the past, but they're still
connected or related, or they haven't effect on now, they have an effect
on the present. Alright? Then we use the
present perfect, simple. And we can use it in a
few different situations, a few different ways. So let's take a look. The
first one, past experiences. So you could say, I
have visited London. We have visited our grandparents every December
since I was young. So it started when I was young and it's still
continuing now. Yes, I've been there before. So all of those are our
experiences in the past, the things that we've
done in our life. We could also say past events that are
still happening now. So my colleague has left
the office already. Alright, So my colleague
has already out. Can I give you a ring tomorrow? Give you a ring means call you. And the neighbor's dogs
have gone ballistic. What's going on over there? So go ballistic means to
go crazy with a lots of noise and a lot of barking or fighting or
something like that. We can also give an update. You could say your
delivery has arrived. I signed it for you. And the kettle has just boiled. If you're making a cup of tea or coffee or
something like that. Now, how do we form the
present perfect, simple? So let's take a look. We'll use this formula. We have the Subject, I, you, the dog and so on. We have, has or have, depending on the Subject. And then we have the
Past participle. Now, that's the important thing, that's the difficult part. The Past participle. Don't be scared of the name. It's a scary name, but let's forget about that. So the Past participle
is a form of the verb, but it's different to say the past simple tense,
like Yesterday, I went yesterday, I ate yesterday I saw is
different to that one. The Past participle has
to be memorized because sometimes there are regular
verbs which are the same as, as the Past simple. But very often. And with some of the most common verbs,
they are irregular. That means that they change. So let's take a look so we can look at the first one
there we have awake. So the regular Past
Simple Tense is a woke. So you could say, I
awoke this morning at 06:00 A.M. but then the Past participle is a
woken. So it's different. Alright, get the
irregular past is got, and then we have gotten, we have the middle one
is quite a funny one because it's looks the
same that we say today. I read yesterday, I
read and I have read. In that situation, it
doesn't change at all. So it's irregular
in a different way. It's unusual in a different way. We have write, wrote, written. We have B, was and been, and we have go, went and gone. Those are just a few examples. There are many regular and irregular past participle Verbs, so it's super-important to make sure that you learn the
ones that you'll need. Now, because you're taking this master English
grammar course, I'm guessing that
you've probably already studied a little bit about the present perfect simple tense. Maybe you're not totally
confident with it, but you have the
idea in general. But let's do a little bit
of practice just to see, to see how much
you remember set. We're going to make
some sentences. I want you to write
sentences using the Verbs in the
table down below. So remember it's Subject, has or have, and the
Past participle. So we have an example, we have Awake, your
dad has just awoken. Wait until he's had his coffee before you start
asking them questions. Alright? I want you to
take all the other Verbs, get, read, right, come, forget B, and go. And I want you to make
your own sentence. It can be about
anything, alright? Just whatever you want. But make sure that the
grammar is correct. So right now, I want you to pause the video and have a try So welcome back. Hopefully you have had
a tray at those ones. Let's take a little look. So get we've met a question. Haven't they gotten
their exam results yet? Remember, if it's a question we're going to start with the have all the haven't read. Have you read Shantou RAM yet? If not, you should write. I've written. Now remember if you're writing something
formal like an essay, you would say, I have written. But if you're
speaking, you'd say, I've written I've written such a heartwarming
thank you letter. The next one is come. Your aunt has come all the
way from Ireland to visit. Forget both of us have forgotten everything we
learned. That's bad news. Be our kids have
been overseas and go Our kids have gone overseas. Now take a look at
those last two. So you might be thinking, well, they're the same. Actually there's
a difference and that's something that many
people get confused about. So let's take a little
look at our kids have been overseas or our
kids have gone overseas. Let's figure out what the
differences between those two. So each one has a
different meaning. And what do you think could be the difference between them? So if we use been, it means that the
kids went overseas, but then they came back. They have the experience
of going overseas. But now that back. But if it's gone, that means that
they went overseas and they are still there, they haven't come back. Yet. Another couple of words that people often
get confused about. These two, since and four. So let's do an in-depth look at these two and figure
out what the differences. So each of these has
a different meaning. We use them for
different purposes, for different types
of sentences set. Since refers to a time in the past and how
it relates to now. I like to think of
since as the time that something
started in the past, when it's still true now. So it's like when this
thing started example, I've known Robbie since
I was three years old. Alright, so me knowing Robbie, that situation started when
I was three years old. Jane and I have been
neighbors since last year. Let's say I moved to
this house last year. That is when that
situation started. And since changing jobs, I've been more content
with my Lifestyle. Alright, so I had all of this time where I
was not very happy. Then I changed jobs and
starting from this time, I was more content. I was more happy. And you can notice
that all of those are using the present
perfect, simple. I've been more content. We have been neighbors
and I have known Robbie. And then four is something
a little bit different. Four tells us how long
something has lasted. So an exact length of time, not when it started. That since four is how
long it's been happening. So I've known Robbie
for 20 years. Alright, so be careful. Some people say, I've
known Robbie for 20 years ago. Totally wrong. The ago is not right. Okay. So I've known
Robbie for 20 years. We have 20 years of experience
of knowing each other. The next one, Jane
and I have been neighbors for two days. Alright? So the length of time is very short,
just two days. But you could also say, Jane and I have been
neighbors since two days ago. You could say that the
grammar would be right. It would sound a
little bit weird. Usually we say for,
in that situation. But you could use since then. I've been stress-free in my
new job for the whole year. So the whole year is how long? I have not had any stress. Now, we've looked at been
and gone and we've looked at since and for now it's time
for you to have a try. Alright, so it's a quiz. I'm going to give
you four sentences. You have to choose the right
words for each sentence. So here's 123.4 there so long that I'm not
going to read them out. You can read them yourself. I want you to pause the video, and I want you to choose the right words and
don't just guess, try to work it out. Use the logic of what
we've talked about. Use those rules and see if you can get all of
the right answers. Pause, have a tray. Now. Let's take a look
at a few answers than the new intern had only been working here for three weeks. When he decided to quit. Alright, so he had been here and then just three weeks
and then didn't like it, quit. The next one. We haven't seen such a
thrilling film for ages. Now that's a fixed expression. For ages. We wouldn't usually
say for ages. So we say for ages
means for a long time. The cinema was great too. I've never been there before. It can't be I've
never gone there. It's because then you're
still at the cinema. So I've never been
that we're talking later and talking
about our experience. Went to the cinema. You watched the movie, then you came back. So it's been next one. Will have the kids
been they brought in so much mud and
dirt from outside. I haven't seen such a mess since the time we took
them to visit the farm. So we're saying that the time in all of this time that started when we took
them to the farm. All of this time, there's not been very much mess, but right now there's
a lot of mass. We use that word since
we use been here. Where have the kids been? Because the idea is
they went somewhere. They came back, then they
made the house very messy. So go and come back. Been then the last one. Does anyone know where the
security guard has gone? So that means that
you've gone to the building and you're trying to find the
security guard, but he's gone somewhere. You don't know where
he isn't here. He hasn't come back
from his place yet. Where has he gone?
We don't know. I haven't seen him since I
left the building last night. So our time started last
night and all of this time, no sight of the security guard. The next thing for
us to talk about is something that many people
get confused about, which is the difference between the present
perfect simple tense that I have been and
the Past Simple, I went. So just before we start, what do you think
is the difference? Do you know you
confident that you know the difference?
Let's take a look. These two tenses are
commonly mixed up. Sometimes they have the same
or roughly the same meaning, but other times they have
very different meanings. So let's take a
look at this table. You can tell me
what you think is the difference between the
two sets of sentences. So the first one, I
visited the United States. I have visited the United
States. What's the difference? And the second one,
the party ended at 11:00 P.M. the party has ended. Pause the video and
try and tell me the meanings of
those sentences now. Alright, welcome back. So first one, visited and have visited here, the meanings are the same. So we're talking about
your life experience. That includes visiting
the United States. But with the first
one I visited, we could also add some specific time like I
visited it two years ago, last year, yesterday,
20 years ago, or something like that. But if we say I have visited, then we can't add
any specific time. That's an important difference. Past Simple, we can
say a specific time. Present perfect simple. We don't say a specific time. That's also true
for the second one. So we're using the Past
Simple which has ended, not, has ended, is ended. And then we say
exactly what time. So it ended at
11:00 P.M. alright. So we know with the Past Simple
exactly when it happened, but the party has ended
with the present. Perfect. When did it end? We're not sure. Maybe I
ended five-minutes ago. Maybe it ended yesterday. Alright, so again, the present perfect simple
notes, specific time. Now that we know that, let's do a little quiz. Let's see if we
can figure it out. So we have some sentences. You have to complete
the sentence with the right tense of the verb. Alright, so you're not
choosing the verb, you're choosing which tense of the verb to use. Let's
take a little look. So the ceremony late last night and the verb we're
going to use his end. So you have to figure out, is it the Past Simple, or is it the present
perfect simple. And what is the Past Simple or the present perfect simple. Okay. My father, his wallet somewhere in the
restaurant this morning. And that's lose the
products you ordered online a few hours ago and
that's with arrive the courier them here and
I signed for them. And that's what
brain. Then we out for dinner in such a long
time and we're using go, but in a negative way. So with the feeling of no. And we about the delays
for days, that's with no. And the engineering
team still a solution. And that's with find,
but it's negative. Okay, so again, it's the no, no find. That's not the answer. So it's the feeling of note. I want you to pause the
video and I want you to try to figure out
those sentences. Have a try. Now, Let's
take a little look. I think this is great
because this is such a common mistake
that people make. And it really stops
people from getting to that high level of
English grammar. If you don't know the
difference between the Past Simple and the present perfect
simple. It's very hard. It's very hard to be totally confident in your English because you keep
making mistakes. Anyway, let's see if you've
made some mistakes this time. The ceremony ended
late last night. So it's the Past simple because we give
the specific time. My father lost his
wallet this morning. So it's not has lost
its lost this morning. The products you ordered
online arrived when? A few hours ago. So it's a specific time again, the courier brought them
here and I signed for them. Now, those second ones they brought and the sound
are also Past simple. Because we've set the situation, the situation is fixed. It happened a few hours ago. Then we haven't gone
out for dinner for such a long time. How long? We don't know. It's not clear. And also it's using that word for which we know
the word four and the words since very often go with the
present perfect simple. And we have known about
the delays for days. So we started knowing in the past and us
knowing has continued. The information is
still in our brains. It started a few days ago
and still knowing it now. So it's have known. But the engineering teams
still hasn't found a solution. Hasn't found, they've
been trying to find, trying to find, trying
to find Still nothing. So they still haven't
found that solution
22. Perfect Tense Part 2: Now we've done the
present perfect simple. We've gone very deep into that. Let's talk about the present
perfect continuous tense, which is pretty close but
not exactly the same. So what is the present
perfect continuous? It's used to talk
about an activity in the past which
is still relevant, still connected to write
now to the present moment. And it needs the continuous
form of the verb. That means the I-N-G form. The Verbs should have ING. So how do we make it? We say the Subject, I, you, we have or has. We say bean, and then we
say that continuous Verbs. So the I-N-G verb, Alright, so the activity may
have just finished, but it's still
affecting right now, is still connected to write now, for example, why
are you so dirty? The answer, I've been
doing maintenance. So the subject here is I. And then as I have, I have then been and then the continuous doing I've
been doing maintenance. So it means that
I've just finished it or maybe I finished
it half an hour ago. But I'm still very dirty. I haven't had time to
wash, to have a shower. So my activity in the past is still connected to now
because I'm still very dirty. And another one, I've
been painting the roof, so on have been and then painting the roof
is actually exhausting. So it means again, I've just finished
painting the roof. Maybe I've not finished. Maybe it's a really big job. I've just stopped doing
it and I'm really tired. So it was such hard work that even though the hard
work is in the past, it's still making me feel tired. Now. I'm still tired. Or the activity could
still be happening. This is slightly different.
Let's take a look. Let's get there quickly. Dad's been waiting. Now. That's dan has
been when it's dad has, we can reduce it to dance. But remember that's only
for spoken English, not for written English. Written. It should be. Dad has been okay. But dads been waiting for
over an hour already. So it means that started
waiting in the past. He's continuing waiting. More than an hour has already passed and he's
still waiting now. So come on. Let's go quickly because
he's still waiting. So let's do a little bit
of practice now that we remember why we use the
present perfect continuous. So here is a table, and remember the
order is the subject, have or has been, and then the continuous,
the ING Verbs. So cook, the chef, that's the subject, has been cooking since before
the sun came up. The chef must be very tired, so the shaft started and
is still cooking now. Alright. So I want you to
try to make sentences for me using the present perfect
continuous with look, dream, implement and analyze. Alright, so a couple of easier ones and a couple
of more difficult ones. Pause the video, try to
make those sentences now. Alright, welcome back. So let's take a look. So look, my sister
has been looking at getting her own apartment
much to my relief. So looking at getting in this situation means
thinking about it. Making a plan for
doing that thing. It doesn't just mean looking. Alright. It's making a plan of thinking carefully about it. Dream. Graduation
is the moment I've been dreaming of for
the past four years. Alright, implement,
haven't the developer's been implementing
our recommendations? Implement here means to take our ideas and make them
real, start using them. Haven't they been
implementing them and analyze the analysts, have been analyzing the data. And they've come to
the conclusion that the Project isn't feasible. Alright, so feasible means like a good idea or something
possible that we can do. So they have been
analyzing the data. This one we can get
the feeling that they were analyzing
for a long time. They've recently finished, and now they have
their conclusion. Now they have their decision. Now we can do something that is a little
bit more difficult. But I think it's very
important to do. We're going to do a quiz That covers the three
different Tenses that we've been
talking about so far. So the present perfect simple, I have done, the present perfect continuous I have been doing. And the Past Simple, I did. Alright, so this is useful
because when you're really using English
to write or to speak, you always have to choose
which Tense is suitable, is appropriate for
which situation. And that's quite hard because some situations it's
not quite clear. Are some situations
you think, well, they could be this one, but does that have that meaning? And so it's very good
to do this practice. So don't skip this practice. What I want you to
do is to complete the sentences using
the verb in brackets. I'm gonna give you the verb. You have to choose which
has the right tense. And you have to
write back tense. First sentence, what? Study, since we last spoke. So you're going to take study. You're going to decide which
tense should it be in. And how do we form
that tense with study. Then I started
studying Chapter two, but I move onto
Chapter three now. Next one, I finish
that section already. So I focus on the next one. I do with negative with
the feeling of no. Any past exam papers though. The last one, we receive your university
marks this morning and we are both a
little disappointed. This is some parents
talking to you. What have your private tutors
help you with all semester? So pause the video and complete these sentences
in the right tense. Again, think about the logic. Pause. Have a try now. Alright, let's take a
look at the answers. The first one,
what have you been studying since we last spoke? Alright, so it's the
studying that you started at the time that we
spoke last and you've been doing it since, Ben? Alright. I started
studying Chapter two, but I have moved on
to Chapter three. Now. I've finished chapter
two and I moved to Chapter three now
wouldn't be moved onto. Because then the feeling is that we've also moved to
chapter four, chapter five. But if we're still on chapter
three, then it must be, I have moved because it's
connected to the past. The past is still
connected to now. That's when we use the
present perfect simple. Next one. I have finished
that section already. So I've been focusing
on the next one. I haven't done any past
exam papers though. Alright, then the last one, we received your university
marks this morning. Important detail, specific time. So it's received not
we have received now, if this morning was deleted, you could say we have
received it would be correct. But we have this morning. We have a specific time, so we received we are both
a little bit disappointed. What have your private tutors
been helping you with? All semester? So the subject is
your private tutors. And it's a question. So this one's really
all over the place. What have your private tutors been helping you
with all semester?
23. Perfect Tense Part 3: Next tense for us
to talk about is the past perfect, simple. Now, this is where
it starts to get very difficult because this is where we're thinking about several different
points in time. And we have to balance
them in our heads and it can get a little
bit complicated, but hopefully we'll make it
clear now, let's take a look. What is the past perfect simple. So when we talk about two or more than two
events in the past, where one happened
before the other one. So both of them are in the past, but one is even
more in the past, even further in the past, even earlier, you might say. Then we use the
past perfect simple and the Past Simple as well. Alright, and this
is our formula. So we have the Subject, we have, had, had, not have, or has had the
and the Past participle. Now, that's all
very complicated. I think it's a lot
easier if you just take a look at the example
sentences, okay? So the, the one thing
to remember is that the earlier action takes
the past, perfect. Then the one that's later than the earlier one I
told you it was complicated. Later than the earlier one
that uses the past simple. Fortunately, we had brought the laundry in before
it started raining. Alright, so we had brought
so let's say the clothes, we washed them, we put
them outside to dry, but pretty cloudy weather. It might rain. So
we went outside, we got the clothes, we brought them into the house. Then later, it started
to rain. Okay. So the earlier thing was
bringing in the clothes. The later thing, but still in the past was it started raining. Alright, so started
is the Past Simple. And we had brought, is the past Perfect. Then another one, the
thieves had already left the area long before
the police arrived. So the thieves left
some time past. The police arrived
sometime Past, and then it's now it's
two times in the past. I had explained it several times when the teacher
finally arrived. So I explained once. I explained another time, another time, then
the teacher arrived. Okay. And then some more time, and it turned into now, something else that
people get confused about is the difference
between the past perfect simple and the
present perfect simple because the names
are similar, right? So what exactly is the
difference between those two? Let's take a little
look. So the two Tenses have some different meanings. What is the difference
between these two? We've got two examples. I am so proud of myself. I have just submitted
my bachelor's thesis. So that one is using, you can see, I am, That's
the present simple tense. And I have, so that's
the present Perfect. Then the second one. I
was so proud of myself. I had just submitted
my bachelor's thesis. What's the difference? Have a think about it. Because almost all of
the words are the same. But the, the background
situation is quite different. So what exactly is
the difference in the first one that
I am and I have, it means that you submitted
your thesis very recently. It could be like 5
min ago, 1 h ago, or yesterday, but sometime
that's quite close. And so doing that thing, giving in your thesis still
is making you feel proud now. So it's a past action. It's connected to now, it affects now, it still
makes you feel proud. But the second one, we're still talking
in the present, but we're looking into the
Past with thinking about something a long
time in the past. We're kinda telling the story of something that happened
to us in the past. This might be if we are 100 years old and we're
writing the story of our life. I remember when I
was 23 years old, I had submitted my thesis. So you're looking into
much further into the past And also it doesn't give you that feeling
of being proud now. Alright, that's the
important detail. In the first one. The feeling
is closely connected. The submitting
happened recently. So you're still feeling proud. But if we use the
past Perfect I had, then we're showing that it
was much further in the past. So we don't still have
that feeling of yes, I did a really good job. I'm so proud that
that connection between the action and how
we feel now has broken. The connection is finished. And that connection could be finished because of two things. So the first one
could just be like, now you're 100 years
old and it's just so long that you don't feel
very proud anymore. Or it could also have
the feeling of like, but then we give some bad news. So I had just
submitted my thesis, but I didn't realize that I'd written it in
the wrong language, or I'd done something
really stupid, or I gave it to
the wrong person. So it has both of
those possibilities. Both of them mean that
now in the present, when not feeling proud, maybe because it was so long or maybe because we did
something stupid. Now let's do a little quiz
to make sure that you're confident using the past
perfect simple tense. Let's have a look. We're going to make
some sentences using the verbs in the table. And we're going to
use this formula. First of all, we've
got considered and we've got an example. So the development
team had already considered this solution when the business analysts
suggested it. Let's think about
the time logic. So we have the,
the earliest time, which is when the development
team, we're considering it. So that was very early, they had already considered it. Then we go forward in
time, closer to now. Then the business analysts made the suggestion and
then we have now, okay, so the earlier one is when the development team,
we're considering it. So I want you to make
sentences kind of like that. Hopefully would two different
actions in the past, one before the other
one using use. And then also audit
and analysts as well. Pause a try now. Okay, let's take a look
at some possible answers. So use, humans had
used steam engines for almost 100 years before
combustion engines were invented. So the using of steam
engine started here. 100 years passed, and then combustion engines
started audit. The IRS, the Internal
Revenue Service, had already audited
the company when the company stopped
laundering foreign money. So pretty complicated one. So in the past, the most past, the IRS came
and checked this company. And then later, this company is stopped laundering.
Foreign money. Laundering is like when there's something illegal
happening and you're making their money clean,
not a good thing to do. Then the last one is analyze. The data had been
analyzed extensively. So that's the most in the past, it had been analyzed extensively
when the marketing team finally decided to implement
a data driven approach. So lots of analysis, and then finally a decision
that happened later. One of the difficult
things with the past perfect is remembering which of the actions should be
further in the past and which ones should use the
past perfect had done, and which one should use
the Past Simple, the did. So let's take a look
at another quick quiz. So we're gonna go through
this one relatively quickly. I want you to look at
these four sentences. And for each of the
Verbs in brackets, I want you to decide, should it be the Past
perfect or should it be the Past Simple? Write it. Okay, Pause the video. Have a try now. Okay, let's take a little look at
some possible answers. So when we arrived at
the airport in Dubai, one of the staff told us the airline had
lost our luggage. Alright, so think
about the logic. The luggage was lost before. Then later we got
to the airport and So the person told us, so the earliest one we use
the past perfect had lost. The next one. By the
time I got home, the fire had burned
through the whole house. The fire started earlier. Lots of fire. I got home, destroyed
house. Alright. I had spent so much
money at the festival that I couldn't
afford a taxi home. I had to catch a lift
with one of the DJ's. So the DJs drove me home. So all of the spending happened first very
far in the past. And then when it
was time to leave the festival, no money. Then finally, after I had
had my tonsils removed, I stopped getting sick so often. This is one of those strange
ones where we have had had, which seems like it should be a mistake that
actually it's correct. So to have my tonsils removed
is a fixed expression. Tonsils are the things
in your throat there. So that happened first. And then the stop getting
sick happened later. Let's continue by looking at
a pretty complicated tense, the past perfect
continuous tense. So what does the past
perfect continuous is pretty similar to the
past perfect, simple. But instead of an
activity that happened, we say something was happening. So it often has the
feeling of lasting for quite a long
time and we'll see some examples of
that shortly. Okay. And also, it usually happens
Like it's happening earlier. I'd for a long time, but earlier than another action which uses the
past simple tense. That's a lot of words. Hopefully, it will be clear
when we look at the example. But here's how we make it. We say Subject had been doing, going, seeing, eating,
watching. For example. Luckily, I had been
saving for my whole life. Alright, so I had been saving, I started and I continued
saving and I continued saving. So I could manage during the 2008 financial crisis
when everyone went broke. Could manage Past Simple, went broke Past Simple. Alright. So all of
those ones were later than when I
was doing my saving. If we want to put this
in years, you might say, I started saving in
1995, for example. I saved until 2008. So I had been saving. And then the financial
crisis happened, but I was okay. Then this one I
think is very clear. So this could be your
one that you take away and you can learn
it and study it. By the time my nephew
finally arrived, I had been waiting in the
airport for almost 3 h. So I started waiting. I kept waiting. I kept waiting. I kept waiting
after 3 h still waiting. My nephew finally arrived. Now we're gonna do
a little quiz with the past perfect continuous. But first, let me
give you an example. So you're going to
write a sentence that connect two sentences together. So one nice long sentence using nice complex grammar
to impress people. So the first part is there
is a new board of directors. So in a company, then you're going to turn that
into the Past Simple. So when is that happening?
Have a think about that. And then the past perfect continuous part of your sentence will be work at the
company for two years. And underneath we can see
the completed sentence. So I had been working at
the company for two years. We found out there was a
new board of directors. So the Past Simple
Part really could be the found out Part or it
could be there was Part, both of those other Past simple. So it was a long
time of working. And then suddenly some big news. Let's take a look
at another one. And this one, I want
you to try by yourself. So the Past Simple Part
should see a Dr. the past perfect continuous Part
felt sick for a few days. So pause, try to write
that sentence now. Okay. Let's take a look. I finally
decided I should see a Dr. because I had been feeling
sick for a few days. Alright. So the feeling
sick, feeling sick, feeling sick feeling sick after several days. This is too much. I need to see a Dr.
make a decision. So that's one. Let's try a
few more of those as well. So the first one we've
got the Past Simple, get an electric guitar, always a good decision. And the past perfect
continuous Learn the guitar for one-and-a-half years.
And then another one. The Past Simple, be
tired and the past perfect continuous
hiking for a long time. So for both of these, I want you to write
the complete sentence. Pause, have a tray now. Ready to have a look. First one, my parents
got or bought me a brand new electric guitar after I had been
learning the guitar, or just learning for
one-and-a-half years. Alright, so learning, learning, learning,
learning, learning. Good job son, here,
electric guitar. Probably you are learning on some other kind of
a guitar Laika, very basic acoustic guitar. And then they thought he's
been learning very well. Electric guitar. Then the other one, we had
been hiking for seven days. So we were all just
about finished. And by the way, finished means
very tired or exhausted, but it's an informal
way of saying it. Okay. So hiking, hiking,
hiking, hiking, hiking. At the end, very tired
24. Perfect Tense Part 4: We've talked a lot
about the past and now let's take a
look at the future. So this is the future
perfect simple. So what is the future
perfect simple? We use this Tense to talk about an event in the future that will be finished before another
event or another time. Alright, so it's looking
into the future and dividing it into
different activities. So we do it by saying
the subject I, you, we will have, and then
the Past participle. So it's the Past participle, but we still use
it for the future. So an example, the contractors
That's the subject, will have constructed the
new engineering building by the end of next year. So if we look at
the time between now and the end of next year, sometime in this period, maybe one-and-a-half
years, they will finish. So when we reach the
end of next year, it will already be finished. The finishing the
constructing will complete before the
end of next year. In other one, before the
end of this quarter, we will have established an extensive customer base in two new international markets. So again, it's the same idea. So we have from now until
the end of the quarter, and we're going to complete these two actions or to
new markets in that time. And the last one, the
next time we visit you. So from now until the next
time point in the future, we will have adopted
three new dogs. So our plan is to get three new dogs before
we visit you next. Now that we know what the
future perfect simple is more or less, Let's do a little practice. So I want you to make
me some sentences to complete these
situations. Step. We've got a future
time or event, and we've got the thing
that you should convert. The future perfect simple
future time or event, you arrive at your
destination and then the action drive a
distance of 400 km. So you're going to turn
those two pieces of information into a sentence using the feature
Perfect simple. And you'll do the
same for this one. A future time or event is before anyone else a good
time to do something. And then the action is,
submit three analyses. Alright? Pause the video, write, meet these two sentences now. Okay, that should
be enough time. If you haven't had a try, make sure you pause
and have a try. Now, it's kinda hard, but that's why we're taking this master English
grammar course. So by the time we
arrived this evening, we will have driven
more than 400 km. Alright, so the time is now and we'll look into the
evening and saying, between now and then, we will have driven
more than 400 km. Or maybe we've
already driven 200, but we know we're
going to drive another 200 by this evening. Okay. Then the next one, my team will have submitted three complete analyses before anyone else even
enters the office. So like my team is super
fast and really effective. So they will have submitted three analysis even
before anyone arrives. Let's do a little bit more
practice of that as well. So we have score one more goal and break
the scoring record. Sports thing. We
have get home and kittens scratches the furniture. So that's having a pet thing. So make me two more sentences. Now. Let's have a track. If I score another goal tonight, I will have broken
the clubs record for most goals scored by a defender. Alright, so that's more like
a imagining a situation. So it's a little bit different, but still, the time in
the future is tonight. Alright, so if I
square root tonight, I will have broken that record. Since the babysitter left early, the kittens will have scratched all the furniture by
the time we get home. Alright, so we get home here, but the babysitter left here. And in all of that time Lots of scratching, lots of destroying furniture, and
you know how it goes. Now, usually we do the perfect simple and then
we do the perfect continuous, and we even do that
for the future. So Future perfect
continuous tense, our last tense for this section. So this is the same basic
idea as the Future. Future perfect simple,
but it describes Future Actions that
happen over time. So often some longer
Actions, okay? So it's the Subject. It will have bean and
the continuous Verbs. So the I-N-G verb example, the contractors will
have been building for six long years by the
end of next year. Okay. So they started building before they're building, building,
building, building. And by the end of next year, it will be six
years of buildings. So they will have been
building next one. At the end of this year. Simon will have been
living in Greece for five years and he will be eligible for
permanent residency. You can get like a maybe a Greek passport or
something like that. So he will have been living
and then don't worry about the engine technicians
will have been maintaining it during
the off season. So this is a little complicated. So we're looking to the future. We're saying, okay, right
now we have a machine. But don't worry
about this machine. Because in the next few months, like when everybody is
on off-season like that, Let's say there on
holiday or they're away. During that time, the engineers or technicians will have
been maintaining it. So by the time you come back, and that's our future point. By the time you come back, it will all be fine because they will have been watching out. They will have been looking after this machine
during that whole time. When you come back, everything will be okay. And then the last thing that we have to do is one more quiz. So we're going to see if you can tell the
difference between the future perfect simple and the
future perfect continuous. So what you have to do is
look at these five questions, these five sentences, and choose for the verb in
brackets in bold. What is the correct tense form? And how do you write it? Alright, so you've
done this one before. Pause the video and
have a try now. Okay, let's take a little look. So the first one, if we count today, how many days will you
have been studying for? Will you have been studying
for without taking a break? So it's like a long connected
number of days of study, study, study, study, study. Alright. So then it's
the continuous next one. If you're not disciplined and
don't stick to your budget, you will have spent
all your money before you're halfway
through your trip. Alright, so if we think
about like the whole trip, then we think about halfway. If you spend your
money too fast, you'll only get to here and
all your money will be gone. Alright, so you will have spent, you will have finished
doing the spending, will have spent
this time tomorrow. I will have submitted all
but one of my deliverables. Deliverables is like the
tasks that you have to do in your job or if you're
studying in university. So I will have submitted there's no point
leaving now, we're too late. The train will have left by the time we get
to the station. So again, it's a finished thing, just like submitted
my deliverables, the train will have left. So even if we run, we don't have a chance
to get there on time, the train will have left. And then the last
one is interesting because the last one
could be either, alright, so the coalition
government will have ruled. So they started in the past
and it's still going now. We can also say will
have been ruling. Because sometimes
the future perfect, simple and continuous
that the areas are the, the situations that they cover meet in the middle and we can use either one and
they're still correct. And this is one of
those situations. So we could say they will have ruled or they will have been ruling for a decade if
they win another election. Alright, so there you go. That is a little run-through
of the perfect tenses. And as with all of this master
English grammar course, make sure that you Review. And of course you can send me any questions that you have. If something's not clear, I'll be happy to help you and I'll be waiting for you with a whole other area of Advanced Grammar in the
next video. See you then
25. Past Actions Part 1: Welcome back. Let's talk
about Past Actions. So really here we're talking about past habits and routines. And we're gonna be talking
about used to and wood. Those are our two main ways of talking about
those Past Actions. There are two ways
of talking about the things we often
did in the past, but don't do anymore. When we say no longer do, means we don't do them anymore. They're not true anymore. The first one is used to. Now that's talking about
past habits or routines. For example, my family and I used to flight to Cape
Town for Christmas. So that doesn't mean that
we only did it one time. If it was just one time, we would say my family
and I flew to Cape Town. So we would use the Past Simple. This one used to fly, it means every year
for Christmas, we would fly to Cape Town. Alright. So it's a habit, not just a onetime thing. Now, we also have use to, the top one used to. The D is very quiet. And then the second one used to, they sound basically the same. It's really hard to know
when we use which one. But the second one
with no D, use two. We only use it for
questions set. Have a look. Did you use to do anything
special for Christmas? So it's not did you use a two? When we have the dead, then the the D from
used is deleted. So it's a question,
did you use two? Did we used to? Okay. So that one is used to and then would is the
other main options. So this is talking
about past habits, but not a state. So have a look. We would fly to Cape Town
for Christmas every year. But we would live in Cape
Town over december each year. So you can see that
one of those is right, the other one is wrong. So the action of flying, we can use wood. But the states, the situation, an ongoing thing of living
we can't use would, we could say though, we used to live in Cape Town over
december each year. So the important thing to remember wood is
for past habits, but not for estate. And just so it's totally clear, we can say we used to live
in Cape Town each December. Alright, That one is correct. If there are ever any situations
when you're not sure, Is this an action
or is it a state, should I use wood or is it wrong to use would
just go for use two. That one's basically
always right. So having said that, let's take a look
at a little quiz. Let's try and practice
choosing right option. We've got two pages
of quizzes coming. So I'm going to open these ones. Give you a look at these, this first page of quiz. You can pause the
video, you can try. Then I'll show you
the second page of quizzes and we'll do the same. And then I'll give
you the answers. So let's take a look at
the first three questions. When I was growing up, we had have a dog called copper. So as it would is it used to or is it used to? They
sound the same. Did you prefer to squash or
tennis when you were young? I'm more inclined towards
tennis these days. So used to or used to. Finally, when we live
in Antigua and TCGA, how do you pronounce
that? Antigua? I think. Yeah, Antigua
sounded wrong to me. Apologies. Anyone
watching from emptier? And if it's not anti-gay, you guys can send me a message and let me
know about that as well. Anyway, we go snorkeling
among the coral reefs. So here we've got two gaps, the choices for the first gap there and the second gap there. Okay, so now I want
you to pause and try to answer these first
three questions. Pause, have a try
now. So welcome back. Let's take a look
at the second set of questions. Here's
the first one. Gustav, be the opening
bowler in our team. But when fast bowlers
became popular, he couldn't keep up and
was dropped from the team. You mean he wasn't the
fast bowler anymore? Is it would is it used
to or is it used to? Rachel enjoy roller
skating as a child, but now she's a bit more risk
averse and prefers cycling. Which is the right one.
And the final one. Did your mother also long hair? Is it used to is it
would or is it used to? Pause, have a try. Now Welcome back. Let's take
a look at the answer. The first one, when
I was growing up, we used to have a
dog called copper. Have is a state Verbs, so it lasts for a long time. So we couldn't say
we would have a dog. It must be we use to have a dog. Did you use to prefer
squash or tennis? So the clue here is
because it's a question. So did you use to when we
used to live in Antigua, we would all we used
to go snorkeling. So interesting, why is the
first one only used to? The second could be both. What do you think? What's the, what's the logic of
the grammar here? The logic is that the
first one is a state. Living somewhere is a long, long thing, long activity. So then we have to use, used to. But then the second one is just a regular daily activity like go snorkeling
or go shopping. So then we can use
wood or used to. Both are correct. Then
Gustaf used to be. So again, be just
like have just like live a long-term thing. He used to be the
opening bowler. Rachel used to enjoy
roller skating. So the important word here, the important verb is enjoy. It isn't roller skating. Enjoying lasted for a long time, so it's a state, so it has to be used to. And then the last one, pretty easy because it's a question. Did your mother also
used to have long hair? And it's important
to be able to use these ones to make your
own sentences as well. So let's do another
little writing activity. So I want you to write the ending for these
three sentences. First of all, the first one, we used to go to my
yoga on holiday. And you can finish the sentence. The second, I used to eat meat. Then did you use two? And then you can ask
a question there. So you're going to
complete those three. And I want you to
answer these questions. We're you well
behaved at school. How often did you
get into trouble? Like, how often did the
teachers get angry with you? What foods did you
hate growing up, but have come to
appreciate or have come to Lake now
that you are older. Okay, so it's about your
Changing taste in food. And what music did you
listen to as a kid? So you can see all of these questions are
about those past habits, past behaviors, past routines. So you're going to answer
the three questions there. So pause the video and try these two activities.
Welcome back. Let's take a look at
some possible answers. So we used to go to
my yoga on holiday, but now we prefer to
visit family instead of spending lots of money on
tickets and accommodation. So next one, I used to eat meat, but I don't anymore. And you can see that when
we're using these sentences, these words like
used to and would, very often it's a
two-part sentence. So look at the first one. We used to go to a
yoga on holiday, but now we prefer. So we've got the now. And the prefer is in the
present simple tense, the same with the second one. I don't anymore. So we're talking
about a change from your behavior in the
past compared to now. Used to eat meat? Now I don't eat meat. I don't I don't
anymore because of the environmental impact and the risks of heart
disease and colon cancer. Pretty scary things. Did you use to play
the saxophone? And why did you stop playing? And then we can look
at the question. So we're you well-behaved or did you get into trouble? A lot. So my answer, I used to get
into trouble all the time. I used to hang out with a
guy called Walter and we would constantly play
pranks on the teachers. The teachers used to give
us the tension every week. Okay. So the, you can see the wood is talking
about an action, playing pranks, doing
tricks on the teachers. So that's why we've used wood. Alright, so we've used
a little mix there. Let's take a look at the
second question about the foods that are opinion
has changed over time. I used to really hate again, haters a long thing. So it's a state. I used to really
hate the texture of mushrooms since I'm older now. I've come to
appreciate the flavor it adds to a dish. Very true. Mushrooms are very nice. What music did you
listen to as a kid? I grew up on rock and roll. So I would listen to all the classic rock
legends like Led Zeppelin, Black Sabbath, and Eric Clapton. Listen is an action, it's an activity,
it's not a state. So we can use, would
26. Past Actions Part 2: So that's one way
that we use, used to, but there's another use for use two. And let's
take a look at it. That's when we're
showing that we are familiar with something. And many people get
confused between these two different ways
that we use, used to. So we're going to make
it hopefully nice and clear is to show your
familiarity with something. So another way to use, use two is to show you are
familiar with something, are accustomed to something. And quite often, it's a process where at first you
don't know it at all. It's unfamiliar. And gradually you are
more and more familiar. It's less and less new. So you're used to it. And it's often to show
you are comfortable with a new change, some
things changing. And gradually you are
adapting to that change. And it can be used
in all the tenses. Let's take a look
at some examples. First of all, I struggled
with the workload. At first, workload means how
much work you have to do. But now I'm used to it. And what you can
notice is that here, when we're talking about
being familiar with something used to is used as an adjective. So I am used to it. You might say, I was used to it. So that's one way
that we use it. I am I was are you used
to it? Things like that. Here's another way.
Actually. This is, this example sentence
is full of use two. Let's take a look. How
did you learn to cope? By the way, cope means to be able to deal with a
difficult situation. That's a very good word. I
used to stay late after work. Now that used to because
it's in black there. That's talking about our past
behavior, our past action. I used to stay late after work, getting used to the software. My company uses the getting used to the
verb to get used to. That means to become
more and more familiar. Eventually, I learned to
manage my time better. And after about six months, I was used to it again. So we need some form
of the verb to be. I am, I was, you are, and so on. Alright, so I was used to it. Then. How long do you think
it will take for you to get used to the new weekly
feedback meeting format. Alright, so the will take is
talking about the future. So here we're showing
that not only can it be used in the
present and in the past, but also in the future? It's all tensors. Again, we're using, get used to something that's
become familiar with, get used to that thing. Another more specific
way that we can use this familiar use two
is with modal verbs. So we can combine used to with modal verb and
the perfect tense. Now, if you're not sure
about modal verbs, make sure you check out the section of this course
all about modal verbs. You can watch it again, or you can watch it
for the first time. Okay, so here's an example. I should have been used to the workload by now.
Now what are we saying? What we're saying is
that now I'm still not familiar or I'm
still not accustomed to the amount of work. It still feels like
a lot of work. But I've been working Let's
say I've been working at this company or in this
job for a long time. So I think that
I'm going a little slowly with getting
used to this situation. I should have been used
to it by now is saying, I'm a bit worried that it still
feels like a lot of work. Another example is I would have been used to the
workload by now, but I had to look
after my kids as well, so I wasn't able to focus
properly on my new job. So what we're saying
again is we're not used to it and
we're giving a reason. The reason that stopped
us being used to this new job is kids and life is very busy
and things like that. So that's another way
that we can use it. We can also ask a question. Would you have been
used to it by then if there was more support
for new employees. So again, we're saying you're not used to
it at this point, but they're asking so what was the reason that
you're not used to it they're trying to find the cause
for why you didn't get used to it and maybe having more support would have
solved the problem. And one more is, I could
have been used to it, but I kept procrastinating. That means like wasting time
and not doing the thing that you should do and doing
everything at the last minute. So here what we're
saying is that We had the ability, like we were smart enough to be able to get used
to this thing. But we made some bad choices. So that's why we use could. We had the possibility, but we didn't actually do it. We've talked a lot about use
to so far in these videos, but we don't always
have to use that when we are talking
about past actions. So let's talk about how
we can show regret by using the perfect
tense and modal verbs. They are useful for
showing regrets about a decision someone made in the past if it was
the wrong decision, we want to show I really made
the wrong decision there. These are basically
the third conditional. So if you can't remember
about the third conditional, make sure you go back and
watch those videos again. You can find them somewhere
else in this course. I should have asked her
out when I had the chance. So we know here that this
person didn't ask out. The other person.
Scout means like ask them to go on a date
or something like that. So it was a missed opportunity. I should have done it
when I had the chance. Should you have said that? That's a very nice way of politely saying that was
the wrong thing to say. You can say, should
you have said that? Should you have done that? Should you have eaten that? And it's a really good
form of showing that you disagree with something in a slightly more polite way? No, I shouldn't have said that. So I said the wrong thing. I should not, I shouldn't
have said that. And remember that should can
also be replaced with two. Alright, so you two
have said that. Now, could you have gotten
full marks for your test? So this is the background of this is that you
didn't get full marks. And this person is asking, did you have the
possibility of getting full marks or was it impossible? For some reason?
Maybe you were quite lazy and you didn't
study hard enough. So you could say, I
could have gotten full marks, but I was too lazy. I could have gotten 100
per cent for the test, but the test was canceled, so nobody got any scores. Alright, so those are some of the ways that we
can show regret. But we also can
show possibility. If we're showing possibility, It's the same idea, it's the modal verbs and it's
the perfect tenses is to show there was an alternative
possibility in the past. Just like with that example about the exam that
we just talked about, we could have surpassed, that means to go
higher or exceed. We could have surpassed our
sales target by 20 per cent. Okay, So we're saying
there was the possibility. But then the background
is that something happened to stop us
because we didn't do this. But there was a possibility. Could we have surpassed
our sales target or couldn't we have
surpassed our sales target? And actually, those last
two, the questions, one of them is could, one of them is
couldn't, but they really have the same meaning. And we can see some
examples with wood as well. So we would have surpassed our sales target by 20 per cent. But our suppliers let us down. Let someone down means to
like disappoint someone or do something that causes
damage to someone else, would we have surpassed
our sales target by 20 per cent with a
different supplier? Okay, so that's one
way we can ask that, wouldn't we have surpassed
our sales target by 20% using alternative suppliers. Those are basically
the same meaning. Something interesting
to know is that these are basically
the third conditional, but we're not using
if, for example, you might say, if we hadn't been let down
by our supplier, we would have surpassed
our sales target. Or if we had had a
different supplier, we would have surpassed. That's how we would change it
into the third conditional. But these ones are very close. What I want you to do now is
to write me some sentences. It's time for you to
have another tray. So you're going to
write sentences that show possibility just as
we've been looking at. And I want you to try to
write some questions as well, and also some
negative statements. Let's see our example table. So we have the
situation on the left. We have receive a
promotion at work. We have submit the
application on time and accept the job offer. And on the right you can see our examples that we
can use to check. So Georgina could have
gotten the promotion. So there's an alternative
possibility that if something had been
different than it was possible for Georgina
to get the promotion. Georgina couldn't have gotten the promotion because
Catherine dead. Alright. So when we
say couldn't have, it means it was impossible because Catherine
was way too good. Could Georgina have
gotten the promotion? She was definitely
qualified for the position. So here we're not
sure we're checking. Was there a possibility for Georgina to
get the promotion? So we have a positive statement. A negative statement
with no And a question. And I want you to try
to do the same for the application
and the job offer. Pause, have a try now. Okay, let's take a little look. For the application. You could, or you should
have submitted it on time. You shouldn't have left
it to the last minute. A question. Could
you have handed in the application before
the deadline? All right. And then you couldn't
have done it in time because you had to take your kids to the Dr. so you're showing the reason why
it was impossible. And then for the job offer, I could have accepted the offer, but I chose another one instead. So in the past, I had the choice. I had the possibility
of choosing this job, but I decided on the
other job, better salary. I couldn't have taken
up the offer because I had already accepted
another offer. Now this is a good comparison. So in this second sentence, we're saying that in
the past there was no possibility to accept this job because I had already signed my contract
with another job. So in this situation
there's no possibility. So we say Couldn't. You can also ask the question, couldn't I have accepted it and then negotiated
the salary? So this one could and couldn't. As a question, again, it really means the
same thing here. So either one would be fine.
27. Past Actions Part 3: Something else that's
very cool that we can do. Talking about Past Actions is
to make logical deductions, talking about what possible
action happened in the past. So we use again Modal
Verbs and Perfect Tense to explain situations
that happened in the past. I think the first one is
a really good example. So what's wrong with the Wi-Fi? So we're saying right now, What's wrong with the Wi-Fi? And the answer, the
Internet may or might or could have been disconnected over the weekend
for some reason. So here the feeling is, we're not sure that
this has happened. But right now the
Wi-Fi isn't working. So something like this
could have happened. So may, might and could all give that feeling
of we don't know. But this is certainly
a possibility. Alright? And it's talking about something that happened in
the past over the weekend. And it's still affecting now. So we're using the Perfect
Tense. Some more examples. Wouldn't our service
provider have contacted us if there was a
problem on their end? On their end means like in in their technology in their
office or something. Okay. So wouldn't they
have contacted us? Yes, they would have. Oh, you could just say yes, but the correct grammar
is yes, they would have. Another possibility is the
cleaners might not or may not have reconnected the router after they cleaned
the staff room. So they unhooked it, they disconnected
the Internet router, the Wi-Fi router, and then
they forgot to put it back in. That's another possibility. So we're just we're
like detectives were talking about
what is possible. We don't know, but these
are some possibilities. Then finally, I don't think so. It couldn't have
been the cleaners because they don't
work on Fridays. So there was no possibility
of it being the cleaners. It couldn't have been then it must have been
something else. So we're sure that this one idea of the cleaners
were sure it's wrong. So the answer must
be something else. We're absolutely sure
it's something else. It must have been
something else. The last thing we're
gonna do in this video is one more quiz, just to check, just
to check that you've been paying attention.
Let's have a look. So you're going to complete
the sentences with a Past Modal Verbs, our example. So you can see at
the end we have the idea or the feeling
which is regret. So we shouldn't have invited so many people that aren't
enough seats for everyone. So we're saying that we made the wrong decision in the past. We invited too many people. Now we have a regret. Alright, so let's take a look at the ones
that you have to run. We called you back, but you didn't
leave your number. So this was like an opacity
intention or a possibility. So what should that be
actually come into work today? She's coughing and
has a temperature. This one is regret. I think about that one.
The feeling is important. Driven himself home
from the hospital. This one's a question. Ai driven myself home
from the hospital. I was still woozy
from the painkillers. This one is two sentences
about the same situation. The first one is talking about a possibility of
Past possibility. The second one, I regret. And then I driven myself
home from the hospital. My left leg was
still in plaster. So that's when you break
your leg and the Dr. puts the big white thing
to hold it in place. Again, that one is a
possibility as well. So this I think, is quite a difficult challenge
because you really have to think about the meaning, the background to be able to
choose the right grammar. So pause, have a
really good try. Do your best, and then we'll
take a look at the answers. Try now. Welcome back. Let's take a look at
some possible answers. So we would have
or we could have called you back but you
didn't leave your number. So this one is a possibility or maybe an intention as well. So we're saying like, sorry, the reason that we
didn't call you was no number an important word is, but for example, if
you if you answered, we wouldn't have or we
couldn't have called you back. It wouldn't have been right
because think about it. We couldn't have
called you back. But you didn't
leave your number. Now, if we change, but for because it
starts to make sense, we couldn't have called you back because you didn't
leave you a number. That would be logical. But because we have but it has to be would
have or could have. Next one. Ashley shouldn't
have come into work today. She's coughing and
has a temperature. So this one we call it like
the intention of coming in, but it's also kind of a regret because she's in
she's in work now. We can see luxuries over there. She's coughing and she she
keeps wiping her head. She must have a temperature. She made the wrong decision. She shouldn't have
come into work today. She should have stayed at home. Then number three, could he have driven himself home
from the hospital? So we're asking, is it
possible that he did that? We don't know right now, but we know well, he's he's not here. Where is he? Could he
have driven himself home? And then two answers. The first one, I shouldn't have driven myself home
from the hospital. I was still woozy
from the painkillers. So it's regret. Woozy means like like
not clear headed, kind of like drunk or high. And so I shouldn't have driven. What that means is I
actually did drive, but there was a bad idea. I've I've I've, I've
survived and I didn't crash, but it was quite dangerous, so it was a bad decision. So that one is regret. I shouldn't I did it, but I shouldn't have done it. Then. I couldn't have
driven myself home. So we're saying there was no possibility in
the past of driving. Why not? I have a broken leg. My leg is still in plaster. You can't drive with a broken leg or at least I've
never seen anyone do it. So yeah, there was no
possibility of doing that. So I couldn't have driven. Of course remember that
it's not drove or drive. It's the participant driven. I couldn't have driven. So that is a review
of some past Actions and we've reviewed some parts and we've introduced
some new parts as well. I hope you found it very useful. And of course, as
always, any questions, send me a message, make sure to review this video if
anything's not clear. And I'll be waiting for
you in the next video.
28. Modal Verbs Part 1: Welcome back. In this video, we're going to
start talking about Modal Verbs are going to go really in-depth
into Modal Verbs. So let's take a look. So what are Modal Verbs? They are a type of
auxiliary verb, like a helping verb. And they're very important. They are an essential part
of the English language because they have a lot
of different functions. They do many different
things in English. Alright, and as we go
through these videos, we're gonna be taking a look at those different functions. So what are the Modal Verbs? Most of them, you already know, you might know all of them. Here they are. Here
is the whole list. So we have can, could, may, might, must, shall, should, or two,
that one might be a new one for you,
will and would. There are certain
rules that we have to learn with the Modal Verbs. So we're going to
learn the rules first and then we're
gonna do a little quiz to see if you understand the rules and can
remember the rules. So let's take a look. The Modal Verbs don't behave in the same way as other Verbs. So Verbs, other Verbs, normal verbs like play or
eat, things like that. So they have some different
rules, different behavior. First of all, they don't need
any other auxiliary verbs, and they're always followed
by a base form verb. Remember, base form is talking about the verb in just
it's very normal way. So the base form
of play is play. The base form of heat
is eat, and so on. Okay? So we don't need to, we don't follow it with to eat. We don't say I can to eat
or you should to play. We just directly say the
base form of the verb. We also don't
conjugate Modal Verbs, so we never say, he, Ken's do that, alright? Or my friends should
go to the shop. We don't conjugate, it
always stays the same. We don't use do or does if we're asking a question
using a modal verb. And if we're making a
negative statement saying know about something we
don't use, don't or doesn't. And Modal Verbs can't be
used in all of the Tenses. In certain situations, you have to learn a
different verb are, and we'll talk about that
in more detail later. These are some of the
rules that you have to remember about Modal Verbs. So let's do a quiz now and see how much of
that you've taken it. I'm going to include a
couple of the rules there to help remind you what
I want you to do. Look at these five pairs of sentences and
figure out number one, which one is the correct one. That Part should
be kind of easy. But number two, what is the rule that the incorrect
one is breaking? So for each pair, one is right, one is wrong. So choose which
one is rights and find what is the mistake
with the wrong one. So you can look at these
five and have a try now. So hopefully you've
had a tray at that. Let's take a look
at the answers. So those are the
couple of those rules. Again, she can speak
four languages. So remember that the, we don't conjugate
the Modal Verbs, so we didn't say cans, we also don't conjugate
the verb after. So definitely the sheet can
speak is the right one. So the S is the problem. It should be in the base form, so speak is the base form. Alright, that's the first one. Here's the second one.
Fred cans fetch the kits. So again, there's no S with can. I think that one
probably that was a pretty easy one because we'd never see cans in
English, right? So, yeah, when we don't
conjugate the modal verb, the next one, I think, is a little bit more difficult. This is a problem that many people have a
very common mistake. So it's not Marco
must, to finish. Its, Marco must finish. So again, it's not
an infinitive verb. The two finished to do to go. When we're using a modal verb, it's not an infinitive verb. Afterwards, it's just
the base form verb Okay, then you should not playing in the
street when it's dark. Again, that's a gerund playing. So it should be played. And we can stop by
the post office. Is correct. We do. Can is not correct. Now, this is the one where I
didn't give you that rule. Again, some people do
make this mistake. They put do with a modal verb
and we shouldn't do that. Okay? So we can stop
is the correct one. Let's do another quiz just to keep testing
you on these ones. So remember, we don't use
do or does For question. When we're making a
negative statement, we don't use don't or doesn't. So there's the first pair, that's the second pair, there's the third path and
there's the fourth pair. Pause the video and again, find me which one is correct. And what is the mistake? What rule is the incorrect one? Breaking, pause. Have a try. Now.
Let's take a look. So the first one, you
don't can't park there. So we just directly
say you can't park that or you
cannot park that? We don't use. Would
you like any sources? Is correct. Do you would like is not right? Again, would is our modal verb. And we don't use do
with a modal verb. We don't should
drink a lot tonight. Instead, we shouldn't, we
shouldn't drink a lot tonight. And finally, it doesn't
will rain later. I've heard things like this
a lot with my students. So it will not, or it won't rain later. The correct 11 more very
quick quiz we're going to do. So remember, Modal Verbs
can't be used in all Tenses, and they require
certain extra Verbs in different situations. So take a look at
these two pairs. And I want you to find
me which one is correct, and also find me what is the
new verb that we have used? And what is the verb that can't be used in a
certain situation? So you're thinking
about three things, alright, pause the video and find those three
things for me. Now. Let's take a look. So the first one I mustered
to arrive, I must it. So there's no past
tense of must. Actually, if we want to say
must in the past tense, we say had to, have to and must in the present
Tenses the same, right? I have to do something. I must do something, but we can't go into
the Past with must. We just change it to had to. And the same situation here. So we must make a
reservation soon. We're looking at the future, and we must make a
reservation soon. Not right. So must can talk about
something that's coming in the future and we
don't have to change it. We also certainly don't
say we will must. That would also
be totally wrong. We can use must for
talking about the future. We can take a look at, I think, a very useful table
which tells us all about Modal Verbs that we can and
can't use in the past tense, because we do have
a few extra ones that we need to be aware of. So something that I hear a
lot is people saying a can. And like yesterday, I can do something which is
definitely wrong. But let's start at the top of
the table and have a look. So like we talked about must, if we're in the
past, we would say, have to know if it's
the present tense. You can see present
Tenses in green. And the example sentence. I have to speak the truth
or I must speak the truth. Both of those are correct. But if we go into the past
tense like we just looked at, we can't say I must
ID or a mosque. It would be I had to
speak the truth. Okay. So when you're going
into the past tense with must, use, had to. Now, must not, is
not allowed to. Jamie must not watch
violent movies that's talking about now and also
connected to the future. But if it's in the past, let's say now Jamie is an adult and we're talking about in the past when Jamie was a child, we would say Jamie was not allowed to watch violent movies. To be not allowed. They weren't allowed. He wasn't allowed. The next one is can this is Ken when we talk about the ability, like you can speak English
very well, things like that. And in the past, we're going to use able to, so he can juggle four balls. Jugglers do this like
a, like a clown. He can juggle,
juggle four balls. Or he was able to
juggle four balls. And that's talking
about in the past. And it suggests
that now he can't, maybe he forgot how
to or his arms were cut off or his dad or
something like that. Anyway, it's talking about
his ability. In the past. He was able to, that's a super useful one. Very common mistake that
people make with that Grammar. Next is can for permission. So saying, yes, you can do something kind of like
the feeling of May, you may do something. And our alternative
form for that is allowed to present tense. He can go out with his friends. In the past, he was allowed
to go out with his friends. And another super
useful one is the one at the bottom, which is, should really very common
in the present tense, should, future, should as well. But in the past tense, we don't have any shifted. Shaw showed yesterday. I should do something. Instead. We say supposed to. Alright, so present tense, we should help them set up, help them organize
something. Past tense. We were supposed to
help them set up. So supposed to do something
that was the past. And we can also take a
look at the future tense. So these are some examples of the ways that we can use Modal Verbs to talk
about the future. And what you can see is that
the rules are a lot easier, I think in the future, most of the Modal Verbs
can be used in some way. So let's talk about are able to, I think able to is very good because if you're using able to, it's good for all three Tenses. It can be the past, it
can be the present, and it can be the future. So it's a very useful
one to remember and try to use more
in your English. The sentence, after you register with your
e-mail address, you'll be able to continue
browsing for free. Can the ability can the
physiotherapist can give you an a a consultation next Wednesday or can you
if it's a question, can you give me an
earlier appointments? Can I drive afterwards or
someone have to fetch me. So all three of those
are talking about the ability to do
something in the future. Then if we're talking
about possibility, we talked about could
we use the word could? We could leave the
exam room early. So if you finish, you can say, hey, we could leave the exam early, we're
already finished. Which sounds good. I literally couldn't care less about that. So when you're saying that it
means I don't care at all, I couldn't care less. Then we have good
as the conditional. So if you had a car, you could drive to campus early. If you're not sure
about Conditionals, we have a whole other section in this course, all
about Conditionals. It tells you all of the rules of Conditionals is very useful. Then would be able two, which is a conditional as
well and a very advanced one. I think if you had a car, you would be able to
drive yourself home. Again. Check out the
Conditionals section for more information about that.
29. Modal Verbs Part 2: We've talked about
the different rules related to Modal Verbs. Now we're going to talk
about how we use them, the applications of Modal Verbs. So why do we use them? There are many
different functions, as I said earlier. So one is to show an ability. So you might say my eldest
brother can play the ukulele, that's that little guitar, and make an offer
to offer something. Can I help you carry those
heavy shopping bags? Make a request, please. Can you help me with these bags that too heavy for me
to carry? Alright. So you can offer help or
you can ask for help. Give or ask for permission. May I do my presentation
first, mom? Yes. Then Massimo. Massimo. I'm not sure
how to pronounce. If you're watching
this in your name as Massimo or Massimo, you can let us know
which is correct. I think it's Massimo,
but I'm not sure. Then Massimo can do
His after yours. So that's permission. Give a
suggestion or some advice. You should bring the
cushions inside. It looks like we'll
get rain tonight. Provide an obligation. That's something
that you must do. They must not be late again, or they will be given a fine. Finally, something very cool, which is make a deduction. And we'll look more
about that later. But that's like guessing about something based on some
information that you have, kind of like Sherlock Holmes. Sherlock Holmes is famous for
his very quick deductions. So it could be Zander as wallet, but I'm not sure. Let's go down deeper into each of those
different functions. First, we're gonna look
at showing an ability. So Modal Verbs can show an ability or something
that could happen, something that has the, maybe the ability or the
possibility to happen. So I want you to look at
these examples in this table. And I want you to try to make your own sentences in the place where you can
see the green dots. And I want you to
try, if you can, to make a mix of positive, negative and also
questions, alright, so positive and negative
statements can count, could, couldn't,
and also questions. So pause the video and
have a try at that now. Alright, welcome back. Let's take a little look. So we already had the
ones for can and can't. So we can't go to
the Movie Tonight. We can head out for
a movie tonight. Then could we could
see a movie tonight. And you can see that this
one is like not super, super certain, but it's
not very uncertain either. It's kind of in the middle. So couldn't we see a movie instead of going to the theater? So both of those
are using could. One of them is a question? And then the least
certain shall, shall we watch a movie tonight? You shall fall
asleep in the movie if you don't take a
nap this afternoon. Now, look at Shao. Shao is, it's like a
suggestion and it's often used when we
want to make an ID. We want to say to someone, Hey, let's do something, Shall we get started,
something like that. But it's not all
that common anymore. It's a little bit more
common in British English. In American English. If you use, shall they think, oh
wow, he's very posh. Sometimes it's used
in jokes as well. Like you say it in the way that an actor would
say in an old movie. You said, like we
shall be victorious. Like if you've ever
seen the movie Gladiator from the year
2000s with Russell Crowe. If you haven't seen it,
you should watch it. But that's the kind of
language that they would use. We shall be victorious this day. Game of Thrones uses
that language as well. But it's not all that
commonly used nowadays, really more like in
British English. And generally only if
we're asking a question or making a suggestion, as
we looked at before, we also have the chance
to make deductions, deductions our conclusions
based on logic. So you have some information. You process that
information in your brain, and you come to some kind of idea based on that information. So we've got some examples, a table full of examples here. So we have, on the left
we have the certainty. So at the top It's
very certain way, totally sure about this thing. At the bottom is least certain. So the most certain one is, must The traffic was so
bad this morning, there must be an
accident on the highway. Or we might say there must
have been an accident. We'll, prices will go up
when there is inflation. Again, we're pretty
sure about that. Would getting another
car wouldn't be a wise financial decision should the warranty should cover you for a cracked screen. Now, you can tell by my voice that should is the is the
word where we move from? Pretty short too. Not that sure. So should is the turning points. It's like, I would
say maybe 75% sure, whereas wood is at
least 90% sure. Then we get to May and
we're getting less and less certain less and less sure. The warranty may cover a
battery replacement as well. Can warranties can
cover water damage, but not all of them do. Could you could get your phone fixed and an unofficial vendor. So when we're saying that, we're saying it's a
possibility, it's an option. It might not be the
best idea though. It might be that your
phone gets even more broken and then might they
might offer you a replacement. But I doubt it so that we go all the way from Must down to mate where kinda making a
guess about the future or talking about the future when we don't have all
the information, but we're using what
information we do have to say what is true
or what could happen. The next function to look
at is making a request. So we can use Modal
Verbs to make a request. And we have different levels of politeness when we're
using our Modal Verbs. And so it's very
important that In whatever situation
you find yourself, you use the right tone. So we're gonna do a little
exercise where you're going to pause the video and write
your own sentences. So we've got an example. First of all, we've got the modal verb on the
left, which is can. And then the more
polite way is could. So the first one, can you drop off the kids today? So that's like, it's not rude, but it's pretty direct. And you'd probably
say that light to your husband or your wife or
someone you know very well. And then could you
drop off the kids today is more like you're asking a favor from someone and you probably don't
know them as well. So you would be being a little bit more polite and more
respectful using could. There's not a huge difference, but there is a difference. Then we've got three more. We've got can, may and might. We've got we'll, and wood and
we've got shell and should. Alright, so try to make
some requests with those. Pause the video, have a try now. Alright, hopefully you've
had a try at that. Let's take a look. Sofa can me and Mike, can I stay for dinner? That would be someone
who you know very well. Like if you're visiting
your brother's house, it's a Hey, can I
stay for dinner? And your brother would
say, yeah, sure. And then may is
much more polite. May I stay for dinner? That would be like if
you are a child visiting your like your friend's house and you're asking that parents, you might say, May
I stay for dinner? Then Mai Tais stay for
dinner is very formal. It would be like you're visiting the queen or the president. Might I stay for dinner? I think if you're going for dinner with the queen or the president, probably they have to ask you. You don't just turn up and say, Excuse me, Mr. President. Yes, I'm here. I heard there was some dinner and I'm here for it. Might I stay for dinner? Anyway? Maters is very formal. The next one, will. And would Will you
mow the lawn, please? Mow the lawn is to cut
the grass at your house. Again, we'll is someone
that you know very well. Would you mow the lawn is really asking if
you've got someone round. Let's say you've paid someone to clean your house
or something. Then you want to also ask them an extra thing,
an extra favor, or let's say your
uncle is visiting or something and you want
to ask him a favor, you would say, would you would
you mow the lawn, please. Then finally Shao and should, shall we start the meeting? So shall we start the meeting is let's say if you're
in-charge of the meeting, you're the boss and you're just ready you're
ready to get going. Should we start the meeting
would be the feeling is like, let's say you're not the
boss and the boss hasn't arrived or somebody
hasn't arrived You know that it's
important to start. So you could say, okay, should we start the meeting? So you don't have the
power in that situation, but you still want to
make a suggestion, then we can use should. The next one we're gonna
look at is asking for permission and also
giving permission. So remember, we can use Modal Verbs to do
both of those things. You ask if you can do something, and you also answer to say yes, you can do that thing. I want you to write
me some sentences. Let's take a look
at the table first. So we have very formal
at the top this time. So it may and might then could, and then the least
formal is can. And we can see the example, may I leave early? So that would be a student
asking the teacher, or possibly a worker asking that boss in a quite a
formal work environments. And what I want you to do, you can see the
three green dots. I want you to answer that. I want you to finish
the buses answer. So you're giving permission. Then for the other three
might, could and can. I want you to make a
sentence to ask for permission and also give the
answer to that permission. If you want, you can say no, you can refuse permission or you can give
permission is up to you. It depends how generous
you are feeling. So pause this video. Have a try now. Alright. Let's take a
look at some answers. So may I leave early, sir? Yes. You may leave early or you could just
say yes, you may. That would also be correct. Might there be space
for me to join? You could say yes. Then if we say yes, then might. And then it is a
little bit weird. So in this situation we
just say, yeah, there is. Yeah, sit down, feel free. Could I sit next to you, please? Now, you might have
answered yes, you could. But actually that
wouldn't be right? Yes, You Can. Would be correct or
yeah. No problem. Or please sit down. Please have a seat. And then can that can
you fetch me from James's what does
that sentence mean? It means I'm at James's house and I want my dad to come and
pick me up in his car. Alright. So can you
fetch me from James's? Sure. You can text me when
you're ready to come home. You can send me a message. Let's take a look at giving suggestions or giving
advice to someone. So we often use Modal Verbs if we're giving
suggestions or advice. So let's take a look
at our table here. We have should and
we have could. Now, if you want, I haven't written it here, but you could also try
to make a sentence with two and usually ought to. We don't often use
it as a question. We also don't use it as
a negative statement. Usually it's just
straight up giving advice to someone or giving a
suggestion what they should do. It's the same meaning
as should, ought to. So if you want, you
can try that one. But what I definitely do
want you to try is to make me finish the sentences
that we've got. So for should we have, you should the
neighbors shouldn't, should we shouldn't way. Alright? And the difference
between should we, shouldn't way is pretty like very small
difference really. Should we is more like we're giving an idea
that we've had. And and maybe it's
correct, maybe it's not. It's more like
asking a question. Shouldn't way is
where you really think that this is something
that really we should do. But instead of saying, Hey, this is what we must do, you're making it a little
bit more indirect. You're making it a
little bit more polite. Maybe you feel in
this situation, in this conversation, you don't have the power or
something like that. Okay. We'll see an
example in a minute. And then could, you could or couldn't we, you
know what to do? Pause the video, try to
complete those six sentences. Try to also make them I'm unique and different
from each other. Don't just give the same
situation again and again, try to challenge yourself. And also if you want
to challenge yourself, make a sentence with
ought to pause. Have a try. Now. Alright,
let's take a look. So you should read that
job advert I sent you. The neighbors shouldn't
leave their lights on. Those ones are
relatively easy, right? Should we cancel the booking? And then the Shouldn't is shouldn't we try
to phone them now? You can see that there's, there's that feeling
that the should we Giving an idea. You're not sure. But you're saying,
well, here's an idea. Should we cancel the booking? What the Shouldn't
we is more like, you know what the right idea is, but you can't direct or you
don't want to directly say, we must do that. So you're saying like what you think should happen
in a more gentle way, but still pushing the people around you to agree
with your idea. These are the little differences in feeling that we
get with English. Shouldn't we try
to phone them now? You know that we should
try to phone them. So you're saying to
the room of people, shouldn't we try
to phone them now? Like that? Then could, you could try phoning, but they're very busy. Couldn't we try phoning them? Those two are the same
feelings, same meaning. But then ought to,
at the bottom, that man ought to
polish his shoes. Now, ought to is pretty, pretty formal. I would say. It's not very commonly used, but we do see it
from time-to-time. And if you're looking to make your English
a bit more formal, and then it's a good
one to learn as well. So it just means should, that men should
polish his shoes, that man, or to
polish his shoes. And the last function
we're going to look at is an obligation. An obligation, something
that you must do? So we're going to use must. You don't have a
choice about it. So it's something
that has to happen. Alright, let's take
a look at our table. We have must, Sarah, must, and the criminal must. Alright, so make the sentences
for those and must not. So this is, they
shouldn't do this thing. The children must not
our parents must not. Pause the video. Have a try at finishing those sentences now. Okay, let's take a quick look. So Sarah must complete the
task before the deadline. The criminal must appear
before the courts. So both times, Sara
and the criminal, they don't have any
choice about it. They can't say no, they must do it. Otherwise, they will face
very serious consequences. Must not, the children
must not make a noise. Now, when we're writing, we write must, not. When we're speaking, we
would say mustn't, mustn't. And so it's not mustard
and it's written MUS T N apostrophe T. But we
say it almost like M, N apostrophe T. So the
middle T is silent. Mustn't, the children mustn't make a noise during the funeral, and our parents mustn't know. We use our phones after
09:00 P.M. is a secret. Our parents mustn't know. That is a look at Modal Verbs and some
different functions. As always, if there's
anything that's not clear, you can watch the video again. You can send me a message. I'll be very happy to help
and I'll be waiting for you with yet another topic in the next video.
See you there.
30. Future Actions Part 1: Welcome back. Let's
talk about the future. We're going to talk
about Future Actions. And the first type of
action is making a wish. When we're thinking
about what we would like to happen in the future. And let's talk about using would and could to make a wish. So when we want something
to happen in the future or we want a change to happen. We want something to change. We can use would or could
to make a wish. Alright? So would we use when
you want someone else to change what
they are doing? Alright, so that's an
important detail to remember someone else to
change what they're doing. For example, I wish the baby would stop crying on the flight. The other person is the baby. Alright. I wish they would
change what they're doing. And then could is when you hope that something will change, maybe a situation will
change in the future. For example, I wish I could
be on a different flight. You're hoping that your
situation could change. You're hoping for a
different situation with less crying baby. And I want you to keep those
two could and would in mind as we straightaway start our first quiz
of this section, you're going to look
at the sentence, look at the gap, and choose
at the right option. And we actually
have four options. You can see wood wouldn't,
could and couldn't. So you have to think about
the logic of the sentence and which of the wood
and could it should be? The first one is
all my colleagues will have time off in
December this year. I wish I say the same. Alright. And we have another
one, my mother's wishes, my system B, so
moody all the time. And we've got four
choices there as well. Now we're going to continue
the quiz on the next page. So now I just want you to pause, see if you can answer
these first two questions. Okay, So now we're
going to take a look at the third and fourth question. That was so much FUN. I really wish we do
this more often. The same four
options. And finally, our professor keeps assigning as extra tutorials in the days
leading up to the test. I wish he do that. And the four choices again. So again, pause the
video and have a try. Hopefully you've had
a try at those four. Let's take a look at
some possible answers. All my colleagues
will have time off. I wish I could say the same. Alright, so I wish my
situation was different. I wish I had Holiday. My mother wishes my sister
wouldn't be so moody. So it's the word not
good because it's someone's behavior and its wouldn't because Moody
is like very grumpy. Alright, so less moody, we want less moody. So we would say,
wouldn't be so moody. The next one that
was so much FUN. I really wish we could
do this more often. I wish it was possible for
that situation to come true. And then the last one
is an interesting one. The last one kind
of has two options. One of them is a more logical
option than the other, but there are two options. So the professor keeps giving extra tutorials, extra tasks. I wish he wouldn't do that, or I wish he couldn't do that. So both are
grammatically correct. Meaning is different. In some cases we could
use would or could, we have both choices? But I want you to look at
that last example and think, what is the difference in the
meaning between I wish he wouldn't do that and I
wish he couldn't do that. What's the difference?
Have a think about it for a second. Then I'm gonna give you
the answer. And the idea. So would or wouldn't. It means your professor is
choosing about that behavior. So I wish he wouldn't
do that means I wish the professor would realize
that we're very busy. And he's giving us too much
pressure, too much stress. And he would think, okay, I won't give as many tutorials just before the final exam. So he's making that choice. So with that information, what does couldn't mean here? It means the professor
doesn't have the power. So that the university
makes a rule and it says, no professors can give extra tutorials just
before the exam. And so the professor, even
though we really wants to, he wants to give you
all that extra work. He can't his hands are tied The University has
said he can't do it. So there's no possibility he doesn't have the
power to do it. So that's the difference here between wouldn't and couldn't. Now as well as would
and could we also have the choice of using was or were? Wasn't? Weren't. When
we're making a wish, we can use those
instead of wood. But we do have to change the grammar a little bit so
we can see some examples. So we remember this one. I wish the baby would stop
crying on the flight. Okay. So that's the behavior
that we want them to decide. And if we want to change
the wood, we could say, I wish the baby wasn't
crying all the time. Alright? Or I wish the baby
was on a different blame. Or I wish the baby was
asleep, something like that. Or if it's more than one baby, even worse, I wish that babies weren't
crying all the time. Weren't because
it's more than one. Or I wish the crying babies
were on a different plane. So with those extra options, we can do a little
bit of practice of making our own wishes. So we're going to use all
of the different options. Let's take a look. We're
going to have a look at some tables and write
some sentences. So we've got some examples. First, you can see on the left is the Modal that
we want you to use. So it was and were
for the first one. And then the wish is to
have more vacation days. And then we have the example, I wish there were
more vacation days. Or we can put it with wood and could again, it's the same wish. I wish we could have
more vacation days. Now, we're doing this because it's really
good to have your, to have flexibility, to
have different choices. How you can express
yourself in English. So that's why we
always try to learn several options and we practice making sentences
in different ways. Having said all of that. Here's the thing
that you have to do. So you can see again the
modals along the left. We've got to with
Watson were to, with would or could, and for different wishes. And you have to make
the practice sentences. You have to make
your own example. So pause the video and have
a triad those sentences. Now. Welcome back. I hope you've had to try that. Let's take a look at
some possible choices. So first of all,
living somewhere else, my brother and his
fiance wish they were living somewhere else or wish
they were living elsewhere. That's another great word. Then the wooden could
for afford something. I wish we could afford
to go abroad this year. Abroad means to another country. Notice that it's not. I wish we can, many people make that mistake. Wish goes with could
or would not with can. Hope, goes with can. You can say, I hope we
can go abroad this year. So you match hope with
Cam and also with Will. And you match, you match. Wish we could and would. Important thing to remember. Now, the next one,
different hair color. My sister wishes she was blonde. That's where the yellow
hair or brunette? That's brown hair or
ginger orange hat. And then seen for
your potential. The employee wishes he could be seen for his full potential. That means he wishes that
his boss would see that he has the possibility of
becoming someone very good, very effective, a
very good employee.
31. Future Actions Part 2: The next function, the
next future action that we're going to talk
about is hypotheticals. Hypotheticals, that means
things that are not real. Now. We just imagine, what if, what if
that thing happened? What would you do? Alright, So in that
situation, a famous one is, if you won $1 million, what would you do,
or if you could fly? These ones are hypotheticals
and very useful for, particularly for conversation in English because we
like to talk a lot about imagining amazing things
happening in the future. What would you do? So let's
take a look at the grammar. So this is something that might happen or maybe has a
small chance of happening. And we want to talk about what we would do
in that situation. So sometimes we
want to talk about events that might
happen in the future. We use would or could to
describe the possible outcome. So what we would do
or what would happen. So it goes like this. If Subject we're and two. Now this sets the scene. It means it gives the
background of the situation. For example, if I
were to resign, that means quit right now, what would you do? Notice the two halves of
the sentence if I were to. So that's the thing
that hasn't happened. Could happen if I
were to resign. Alright. And then asking what would be the result or
what would happen next? We say, what would you do if he were to ask
you out like on a date, How would you feel it Suzanne
were to ask for a divorce? Could you say no?
Again, it's not. We'll and it's not can
is good and it's word. Then we can also use this model, which is either saying suppose or saying what if and
then the subject. We're two. Suppose I were to resign or what if I were to resign right
now, what would you do? The second half stays the same. So the question Part,
the result part. But the way that we
form that situation, that background that changes suppose or what if
he were to ask you out and suppose or whatever Suzanne were to
ask for a divorce. What are could you say no. What would you do?
How would you feel? Something you'll notice
here is that all of these, the situation side is using, we're now this is the grammatically
correct way to say it. Like if I were to resign, if you were to do something, if they were to do something, that's the grammatically
correct way. So if you're in an
exam, use were, however, quite often these days, we say was, if I was to resign, it's just more of like the
modern spoken English way. So it's sort of up to you. It depends on how you
want to speak English. If you want to speak in a very
formal, very correct way, then always use we're if you want to be a little bit
more relaxed and casual, then you can speak using was. But still right word
because we're is technically the correct
way of saying it. But it's a little bit flexible
when you're speaking. Something. You might
also notice about all of these is
that they all have a verb immediately after
the two after the subject. So if I were to resign, so the verb is to resign. They have an infinitive verb. If he were to ask
you out or to ask, or to do, or to go. Now, that is one way of
forming this hypothetical, but we have another way as well. If we don't include a
verb straight away after, after the war, then we can
just directly at the subject. So it'd be Subject, we're, and usually it goes like this. It goes if Subject,
we're object. What do I mean? I mean this if you look
at the second one, if I were you, if I were you or
if Daniel were me. And another way to say that is the first sentence which is if you were in my shoes, that just means if you were me. This is a way that
we often like, give advice or give suggestions. You could say like
if I were you, I would, blah, blah, blah. You might have
heard that one like in an English class before. So if I were you, I would run away very fast. If I were you, I would
finish my homework on time. Okay, so let's look at
the full sentences then. If you were in my
shoes, notice no. Two, if you were to
walk in my shoes, you could say, but we
can just directly say if you were in my shoes
and that's totally fine. How would you resolve this? So the second half
stays the same. How would you do something? If I were you, I wouldn't react like that. If Daniel were me, he would understand
my perspective, my point of view. Okay. So this gives you a little bit more
flexibility again, when you're making
your sentences. And you can also use
these suppose or what if you can substitute them in just like we saw
in the previous ones. So suppose you were in my shoes, or what if you were in my shoes? Suppose I were you. We can use that
one to be honest. We always would
say if I were you, but it is possible to use that suppose or what if as well. So many choices for
these hypotheticals. Now we're going to move
on to a little quiz here, and this course has several
parts, several stages. Pay attention. So I want
you first of all to write a question using
those constructions that we've learned.
So here's an example. On the left, we have the
hypothetical situation. So be the CEO of your company. And then we make
the whole sentence, which is a question. So if you were the
CEO of your company, what would be the first
thing you would change? Or you could say, what
would you change? First of all, alright, so you're making an example
question with two parts. You're saying that if
you were blah-blah-blah, you're setting the situation, then what would you do? You're asking the question, you're asking what
would the result be? So here are three
more hypotheticals, three more imaginary situations. We have your best friends
steals from you, your child, your son or daughter
gets caught shoplifting, stealing from a shop, or you are late for an
interview for your dream job. That sounds like
That sounds like a nightmare that I would have as a your dream job and then you're trying to get
there but you're late. So remember what you have to
do is to ask the question. You're writing a question using this grammatical style and one question for each
of those situations. So pause the video and
write those questions. Now. Let's take a look at
some possible questions here. So the first one, what if your best friends stole
something from you? How would you respond? Now, notice that we
didn't use Words. Instead, we used the
Past Simple of steel. So what if your best
friend stole something? You could also say, what if your best friend were to steal? That would also be okay? But probably the most direct, simplest way is to say stop. And then the real question
is, is pretty simple. What, how would you respond
or what would you do? How would you feel? The important word is would then your child gets
caught shoplifting. If your child work Koch, it's caught stealing
or caught shoplifting, how would you react?
What would you do? Would you punish him or her? I think probably, yes. Right. Then the last one on being late, the
nightmare situation. If you were to arrive late for an interview at
the job of your dreams, how would you react? What would you say
to the interviewer? So now we've made the questions, but the next step is to
answer those questions. So I told you this is a
quiz with several stages. This is the second stage. So you're going to write a response and let's
see an example. So the CEO of your company one, the one that we showed you. So if I were the
CEO of my company, the first thing I would
do is give everyone a yearly cost of living adjustment that
keeps up with inflation, pay them more basically. So notice that this is
also a two-part answer. Of course, when
you're, when you're answering this in real life, if you're in conversation, you could directly
say the word Part a. The first thing I would do
would be to blah, blah, blah. But because we're practicing, because we're aiming to get
perfect English grammar. I want you to write
the first part to set the situation as well. So the if I were the
CEO of my company. So you've got your three you've
also got your questions. I want you to answer
your own questions, so check your
questions again and try to answer those ones in a full sentence with both
halves of the answer, setting the situation and
saying what you would do. Pause. Have a try now. Okay, Let's take
a little look at some possible answers then set your best friends
steals from you. If my best friend were to
steal something from me, I would feel
disappointed and hurt, but I would also try to
understand why he or she did it. So notice that we've
got two woods for the two different
Clauses in our answer. We've got, I would feel, but also I would try. Alright, so if you
start a new clause, like you have the comma and
you start a new clause. So you see after and hurt comma and a whole new Part
of the sentence starts, we need to put wood
in again to keep it with that feeling
of it's not real, but I'm imagining
what I would do. The second one, stealing
child, very naughty child. If my child were
caught stealing, I would be extremely
disappointed, but everything has a reason. So I I would usually
when we're speaking, we say I add it to
try to figure out, figure that out before
deciding on a punishment. Still going to give a
punishment that right. Maybe just not as severe, not as stricter punishment. Then the last one, late
for the interview. If I were late for the most important
interview of my life. You could also say if I were to arrive late,
both would be okay. I would apologize profusely. That means such a long
and extreme apology. I'm so sorry about it. Then I would ace the interview
to make up for being late. As the interview means
do like a really, really good job
in the interview. Sounds like a pretty
reasonable thing to do to make up for being late.
32. Future Actions Part 3: Something else that
I think is quite difficult and many people
make a mistake on, is when we're thinking about a combination of the
past and the future. What do I mean? So, let's
imagine that in the past, we had thoughts
about the future. Okay, So let's say it
was like Yesterday. We were thinking, what
should we do this weekend? Alright, so that you're, you're, you're in the past. It was yesterday,
but you're looking into the future, the weekend. Alright. So how do we
describe that situation? Many people make a
mistake about that. Okay. So when you're in
that past situation, like if it was still yesterday, You see it's kinda
hard even to explain the situation until
you see an example. But imagine it's still yesterday and you're in that moment, you're in the moment, and you're looking
into the future. We just use the
normal future tense. So we would just say
we'll and a verb, that's the easy one. So an example, I think I will finished my tax
return by the deadline. Or you could say, I think I will go to the
cinema this weekend. I think I will go
shopping this weekend. Alright? So that's when
you are in the moment. Alright, but that's
not what we're trying to do. That part's easy. The difficult part is if we are now looking at that
time in the past, when we were thinking
about the future. Alright. You're
looking at yesterday, when you were thinking
about the weekend. Complicated. To look back and talk about that
thought or that situation. Now, we have to use
a past tense verb, and we use wood as well, but we keep the same
main verb, sell. The same situation,
that same example, I thought I would finish my
tax return by the deadline. Alright, this also has
the feeling of now we know that I didn't do it because I forgot about
it or something. But we're saying that at
that time in the past, my thought was that
I would finish it. Alright. So at that time, Let's say this was
two months ago. I was looking into the
future and I was saying, yes, I will finish
my tax return. So when we are here now in the present and with thinking
about that thought we had, or that plan we had in the past. We would say, I thought
past simple tense, I would finished my tax return. So that's kind of a
complicated idea. Hopefully, after
this explanation it's a little bit clearer, but we're also going to
do some practice as well. The first type of practice
we can do is a quiz where I want you to
choose the right words. So you have to look at the two options this
time it's will or would. I thought you will do that? I thought you would do that. You have to choose
which ones, right? But the way that you
choose them is to look at the whole sentence and see if you can find some
help in that whole sentence. Okay? See if you can
look at maybe some of the other Verbs and they
can give you that idea, or maybe some other clues, some other suggestions
in the sentence. You have to make
the whole sentence match and have perfect Grammar. This first one's
pretty easy I think. But they get a little
bit more complicated. So I'm just going to
let you look at them, look at the five altogether. And I want you to work on them. And then in a minute, we'll read through together. So pause, have a try. Now. Welcome back.
What did you think? Difficult, easy,
not so difficult. Let's take a look and see if
you've got them. All right. The first one I think
is is definitely the easiest, it's the shortest, and we just have to match
the wood with the thought. So remember, it's
the Past simple. So that first part,
the Past Simple. And then we match
it with the wood. I thought you would do that. So we're looking at our idea
in the past and saying, I knew, I knew
what you would do. I thought you would do that. Then the more difficult ones, I didn't believe my
professor when he said The only one-third of us would pass the course at the
end of the semester. Now, important word
is at the start, I didn't, I didn't. So that sets the whole scene, the whole time of this sentence. It makes it in the past. So I didn't believe
when he said that we would those all have to match. My father told me
not to call him 4-6 because he would be at work. Told not to call
him would be again, we're matching the past word. Even though they are old. Now, I knew that
Metallica concert, that the Metallica
constant would be an exhilarating experience
and I was happy to fork out. That means to pay the money for inexpensive trip
to see them live. And finally, one of
my colleagues, Ella, thought she would become
the next team lead, but sadly, she didn't
get the promotion. Now, why is it get a knock, got its get and not gut? Because it didn't, didn't already has the
past tense in it. So we don't say didn't
got, didn't went. We say didn't get didn't go. She's a strong contender
for the job and maybe she will get it next time. So remember, we're talking now. We're looking at
something in the past. That's when Ella
didn't get the job. But at the end we start to
look towards the future. If there is a next time
the job is available, maybe she will get it, then, so that one
should be the future. Now we also have another
choice instead of using will or would, when we're talking
about looking to the future or a Past thought, looking at the future. We can also use going to, as we've talked before, as we've said in this
course a number of times, going to is definitely like more common in spoken
English than well. So it's important
to know how to use going to in this
situation as well. Okay? So we can use going two plus a verb instead of the will or the
word plus a verb. Okay? So for example, in the, in the moment, in that past situation, I think I will finish
my tax return. Could be. I think I'm going
to finish my tax return. All right. That one
we already know. But then how does
it change if we're looking at Past
situation from now, we're standing in the present, looking at what we
were thinking before. I thought I would. How does that work with go into so I thought I would
this one we know. I thought I was going
to so it changes. It's not I thought I am
going to is I thought I was going to the was going
to replaces the word. I'm going to replaces. Well, okay, so that's
another bit of flexibility when
you're talking about those Past and Future Actions.
33. Future Actions Part 4: Now let's do a little
bit more practice of choosing the correct pair or the correct sentence and
finding problems and making sure our sentences
are grammatically accurate. So let's have a look. The first one, we're
going to choose, these two are going to see
which one is the correct one. So you have Ian was
going to assist me during the onboarding
process but he was on leave or Ian would
assist me during the onboarding process
but he was on leave. Alright. Which one is wrong? And why is it
difficult question? So pay attention. We have two more pairs. There's the one and
there's the other. So I want you to choose
which one is correct. And also see if
you can find what the problem is with
the incorrect one. Pause, have a tray. Now. Welcome back. Let's take a look
at some answers. So the correct one
is Ian was going to assist me but
he was on leave. Alright. So we look back
and his thought was he was going to assist me. Now, Ian would assist
me but he was on leave. That doesn't match up exactly. And I'm not going to tell
you exactly why yet. Alright, so if you haven't
figured that one out, keep thinking about it. We're going to come
back a little bit later to that
particular problem. The next one is a bit easier. I think the next one is I was going to come visit
you this afternoon, but I decided that
tomorrow would be better. It's just the D I decide
did so we're looking at a time in the past when we first had the thought
I was going to visit. But still in the past, I decided that tomorrow
would be better. Okay. And then the last
time we saw Isabella, she was going to
take up a job offer overseas at take-up
means to accept. And so we're we're
just making sure here that everything is in the past as we're
describing this situation. So the last time we saw, so the fact that we
have number one, the last time, we know
it's in the past and saw. We definitely know
it's in the past. But then she is a
can't be right. All of the situation must match. It must all be in the past. So it has to be she
was going to take up. And we're gonna do
something similar again now with some other
sentence pairs. So we have these two, these two, and
these two as well. Now the last two sets are
both about one called Joseph, who has borrowed our lawn mower and it's going to bring it back. You really have to pay
very careful attention to the details in those two. And in the first pair. Have a think about that unanswered question that we have from the previous page. The thing I said that
we wouldn't talk about yet because you're going to
see the same problem again, but I'm not going to
tell you what it is yet. Okay? So again, pause, choose the correct one, and see if you can figure
out what the mistake is, what the problem is
with the incorrect one. Pause, have a try now. So let's see the first one
then we would take the metro, but it was too busy. So it's that same problem. But which voice sore, which tense, which thing is
missing from that red one? The correct one is we
were going to take the metro but it was too busy. Keep thinking about the
first incorrect one there. Now, these ones are almost identical right
there pretty hard I think, but this is why we're here. We want to have perfect
English grammar. So the correct one is
Joseph said he was going to bring the lawnmower
back This afternoon. So all of it is in the past. Notice. The second one Joseph says he would bring
those two don't match, says Would it should be set, would set or said
he was going to. We could also set say Joseph
said he would bring back. That would be correct. But Joseph says, why is the
present tense doesn't match? Would? Okay, So that's
why that one's wrong. The other one is
the same problem. So Joseph says he would be bringing the lawn mower
back this afternoon. Wrong because of the sales. Joseph said he would be
bringing these are the same. He would bring he would be
bringing this is one of those situations where
the two different ways of saying it have
the same meaning. So you can be
flexible with those. But the important
detail we're talking about Past and Future Actions. The important detail
is the tense, and that's what you
have to be careful of. The last thing we're gonna
do here is take a look at those two unanswered questions. So I want you to
correct these ones. I want you to make them correct, but not in a way that
we've seen so far. Alright, so remember in English, quite often are many ways
to say an idea correctly. And so I don't want
you just to remember what we did in the
previous pages. I want you to see
if you can find a way to adapt
what we have here, these two sentences, maybe thinking about
some Conditionals, some Perfect Tense,
and make them correct. Okay? So pause, have
a try now. Okay. Hopefully you've had a
try. Let's take a look. So really we are bringing in
the third conditional here. So the correct would be Ian
would have assisted me. Would have. He would have. So it's looking at that past situation
and showing a bit of regret or showing a Past
willingness or Past intention. But he couldn't do it
because he was on leave. And again, we would
have taken the metro, but it was too busy. We would have taken
at that time, we were ready to take the metro. We wanted to take the metro, but we couldn't get in. It was too busy. We would
have taken. So there we go. That is all about
Future Actions and also some connection between
Past and Future Actions. I hope you found this useful. Of course, make sure you
watch it as many times as you need to to understand it is a little bit complicated. And any questions,
send me a message. I'll be happy to help and
I'll be waiting for you with another set of videos
very soon. See you then
34. Conditionals Part 1: Welcome back. In this video, we're going to talk
about Conditionals. So these are the different
ways of speaking that can represent different
situations and we'll see all of the
different types as we go. So let's get started
with first of all, the zero conditional. What you'll notice is that
all of them have a number. And the first one is
the zero Conditionals. So when do we use the
zero Conditionals? It's used to talk
about Actions or situations that are always true. So that's the important thing, That's why it's in green. Always true. And we'll see as we go on that the different
Conditionals first, second, third, become
less and less true. Alright, but this one,
the zero is always true. It's also called the real conditional because
the results of the action that
we do is real and it's always, factually
always happens. So we can use this
in the positive or the negative form when
we make a statement. Think about these situations. How could you make a sentence to talk about these situations? What happens if
you freeze water? What would happen? What
happens if you boil water? What happens if you
drop something? Or what happens when
there is no electricity? How could you express any of those situations in a sentence? So when we are forming
the zero conditional, we're going to use the
present simple tense, so the regular form of the verb. So we're going to
say if or when. Then we say whatever
the action is, we'll have a comma and then
we'll have the results. And we can see some
examples is very simple. This one, this one
is extremely simple. But wait, it's gonna
get more difficult. If you put water in the freezer, it turns two. It always happens. If you boil water, it becomes steam and evaporates. It turns into steam into
when you drop something, it falls to the ground
because of gravity, it must be true when
there is no electricity. So is the present simple, the TV doesn't turn on. Alright, so that is one way that we can form the
zero Conditionals, but we could also put
the result first. And then we say F01 and
we say the Actions. So water freezes and becomes is when you
put it in the freezer, water turns to steam and
evaporates. When you boil it. Objects fall to the ground. If we drop them. Kitchen appliances, for example, don't turn on if there
is no electricity. So either way is fine, has the same meaning, result first and Actions second, or action first and
results second. So we're always gonna be using
the present simple tense. That's the zero Conditionals. And of course, the
next one after zero that we should look at is
the first conditional. So it uses the first, second, third type of
numbers, not the 123. Alright? So the first
conditional used to relate a choice in the present with a likely result in the future. So you can see already, we've changed from something that absolutely definitely will happen to something that
probably will happen, but we're not totally sure. So the completely factual, remember is zero or
the real conditional. When we get to the
first conditional, things are talking a
little bit less securely. There are a little
bit less sure. Alright, let's see
some examples. We use the present
simple tense for the action and for
the future results. We use well may or might. And we can use positive
and negative forms. And it can be statements
or it can be questions. It's very flexible. So let's
see how we can use it, how we can form this
first Conditionals. So we have, if we have the action in the
present simple remember, and then the result which
uses will, may or might. So if I study hard this week, so present simple study. I will pass the exam. Alright? If we don't
leave right now, again, don't leave. That's the negative. That one is still in the
present simple voice, this present simple tense. We might not have enough time to catch
a taxi to the apple. If I finish my work in
the next hour or so, may I clock off a
bit earlier today? So this one's asking a question. And just like with the zero conditional, with
the first conditional, we have the choice to reverse the order of the sentence
and put the result first. So again, the
result is gonna be, well, may or might, if. And then the action in
the present simple set. You may clock in a bit
later tomorrow morning If you stay late today. So the May goes
with the clock in, that's the phrasal verb. You might still catch your flight if you
leave immediately. So again, we're talking something that's
not totally sure, but there's a good
chance of it happening. You will get stuck in rush hour traffic if you
don't leave before 730. And then something
in the negative, they won't be impressed
if we show up late again. Now, up until now we've been
using if and sometimes when. But we also have
a choice of using unless with the first
Conditionals. Let's take a look. We can form the
first conditional by replacing if with unless, and it gives the same situation, but the grammar is
going to change a lot. It changes significantly. So we don't have to use the don't or the negative
part of the sentence. If we have F, Let's take a look. If you don't study
hard this weekend, you will fail your
exams next week. Now if we want to use
unless, what would it be? How would we make
the sentence with? Unless what do you think?
It would be like this? Unless you study
hard this weekend, you will fail your
exams next week. So the second part, the result part, is
staying the same. It's still using the will. But the action, the
situation Part That's setting our scene is
changing because if we do, if we have to add that don't unless doesn't need
the feeling of don't. So unless you study hard. Alright, another one. If he doesn't apologize, he might lose his
friend forever. So I'm gonna give
you another chance. How do you make
that same sentence with the same meaning
using unless. Have a think about
it. We're gonna be, it looks like this. Unless he apologizes, he might
lose his friend forever. Alright, and that I
think is a more common, more natural way to say
it than the if he doesn't apologize unless he apologizes,
sounds very natural. Indeed. That's how we use unless with the
first conditional. Then let's move on and talk
about the second conditional. So it's a big surprise. Write zero first and
what could be next? The second conditional. So what is it? The second conditional
is used to relate or connect a choice in the present with an unlikely
result, The future. So that's the difference
between first and second. Alright? Unlikely, it
probably won't happen. We use the past simple
tense for the action, and we use wood for the result. And as always, these can be
positive and negative forms, and it can be statements
or it can be questions. So it's best if we take a look at some
examples and you'll see the Noticeable
Difference between the first and the
second conditional. We form it by doing this. We say, if we say the action and in the
past simple tense, we do a comma and then we give the result using would set. If I one, not when won
the lottery today, I would hand in my
notice at my job. Immediately, I would quit
my job and relocate to a tropical island.
Sounds very nice. So we can see that
this situation is a lot less real than, for example, if you
don't study hard, you will fail your exams. This one is much more unlikely. It's not impossible, but
it's pretty unlikely. If I could fly, I would circumnavigate the
globe from east to west. So it's not if I can fly. If I could fly, what would I do? I would circumnavigate.
Good word, it means go all the
way around the world. If I studied English
for 3 h every day, I would reach C1
proficiency in six months. Again, it's not
study is studied. And it's, I would reach those ones are if we
have the action first. But we can also
take a look at what happens if we have
the result first. So it's the result using wood. If and then the
action in the past. Simple. Some examples. I wouldn't, so it's
the negative here. I wouldn't still be working
if I won the lottery. Would I use this question? Would I use my powers
for good or for evil? If I could read minds? Alright. I'd call my
old English teacher if I still had his phone number. And finally, he said
he would be He'd be more assertive if he
took up kick boxing. So if you started
doing kick boxing, he'd have more
confidence and he'd be able to be more assertive. So in a big surprise, the next one we're looking
at is the third conditional. Who would've thought first, second, and then the third. So huge shock. Anyway Silliness aside, let's talk
about the third conditional. The third conditional
is used to talk about hypothetical situations
in the past. And these things did not happen. So remember, I was telling you that starting from
the zero conditional, each one gets less real. You can imagine it
going from zero down, that the reality goes down and down and
down until we get to. This one is very, very
unreal, very not real. And it's used often
to talk about regret. So like if we made bad choices or we did the
wrong thing in the past, we can use the
third conditional, thinking about what if we
made a different choice? Back then? We're going to use the past Perfect Tense for
the action that's had, done something not have, had, and we use would have or
could have for the result. Now, what is the
difference between would and could?
Can you remember? Wood is talking
about something that we're certain we're
sure about it. And could is expressing
possibility. So like maybe might, may, that kind of thing. Let's see how we can form it and how we can make
some sentences. So we use, if we use the
action in the past, perfect. And that's talking about
whatever situation that was in the past. And then we use the results. And with the result, it's gonna be could
have or would have. If we had left sooner, we could have
caught our flights. So think about the
situation that it means that actually in there
talking about the past. And we can say that they've
missed their flight, that Flights has already left. They were too late. And they're looking back into the past. And they're thinking
if we had left sooner. So if we had done something different in the past,
maybe, you know, really we left at
08:00 A.M. if we had left at 07:00 A.M. it
might have been different. So they're showing
their regrets or that they did the wrong
thing in the past. If we had left sooner, we could have caught our flight still not
sure because it's could, but a good chance that they
would have caught the flight. If we had stuck to
our original plan, we wouldn't have
missed the train. So that's saying that
actually they changed their original plan and
that was a bad decision. They should have stuck
to their original plan. And two more, if I hadn't
been delayed at the airport, I would have arrived in
time to seat the sunset. You might imagine that the
delay at the airport was 2 h and then this person
missed the sunset by 10 min. So he can very confidently say, I would have arrived in time, except for the problem
at the airport. If you had saved more
during your '30s, could you have retired earlier? So we can see that
we are putting the could at the start
of that clause. If we want to make
it into a question, There's an extra
little cool thing that I want to tell you about
for the third conditional, which is the formal
third conditional. This is something that
we don't use too often, but it's a really
nice way to spice up your English to show that you have different ways of talking. And if you're writing
a very formal e-mail, you could use
something like this. So we make it more
formal by using had at the beginning of
the sentence and removing or deleting the if. Let's see some examples. The normal way would be
if we had left sooner, we could have caught our flight. So we can change it to this. Had we left sooner, we could have
caught hour flight. So the result stays the same. But it's the action
that changes. Had we left sooner. If we had stuck to
our original plan, we wouldn't have missed
the last train had we stuck to our original plan, had we stuck one more, if I hadn't been
delayed at the airport, I would have arrived in
time to see the sunset had I not been delayed
at the airport. So that's how we use
it in the negative, had not been delayed. Now as over all of
the third conditional that we'd seen has
had the action first. But as always, we can put the result first
instead if we want. Result could have
a would have IF, and then the action
in the past Perfect. So let's take a quick look. We could have made
the movie if we hadn't taken such long
showers at the hotel. When we say make the movie, it means arrive on time. We could have made the movie. We wouldn't have
been shouted at. If we had submitted our
homework before the deadline, would I have made
the same choices as a teenager if I had
known what I know now
35. Conditionals Part 2: Those are all of the
main Conditionals that we have to know about. And we're going to get
onto a quiz shortly. But first let's
do a quick recap. That means a quick review. So the zero conditional
is if or when, the action and the
present simple. And then the result
or the result if or when an action in
the present simple. Remember that first
conditional is if the action in the
present simple and then the result in will, may or might, or the
result will neonate if, and then the action
in the present. Simple. And remember
that this one is talking about things
that probably will happen. Then we move on to the
second conditional, which is things
that are unlikely. So then if the
action in the past simple and the
results using wood, and then the other way
round the result with wood. If and then the
action in the past. Simple. And of course the
third is the very unreal one. That's if the action
using the past perfect and the result
would have or could have, or results if the
action in the past. Perfect. Let's get
started with a quiz. And I think that this is a pretty challenging
quiz. Let's take a look. So I want you to choose the correct options that
these two sentences. So if the delivery arrives
before you get home, I call you and you have the
choice of will would or would have if she had
joined the meeting after you left, I called you. And then these this
time the choices are we'll have could or would have. Pause the video,
really pay attention, think about all of
those rules and choose the two correct
options. Have a try. Now. Alright, let's take
a look at some answers. So if the delivery arrives
before you get home, I will call you. Alright, so it's something
that could happen. It might not definitely happen, but it could happen. So if and then arrives in
the present simple tense, and then it's, I will. So this one is the
first condition. Then if she had there's the important word joined
the meeting after you left, I would have called
you. There we go. We match the hat and the would have an that is the
third conditional. Let's take a look at
two more sentences. These ones are
actually questions. Let's see if you can
choose the right option. What will you do if
you your driving test? It's a question and
another question, what would you do if
you your driving test? So I want you to do
two things this time. I want you to choose
the right option. And I want you to think, what is the background
of these two questions? What's the difference
between them? Pause, have a try. Now. Welcome back. Let's take a look
at some answers. So what will you do if you
fail your driving test? And what would you do if you've
failed your driving test? So we're matching the will
with the present tense of fail and the wood with
the past simple tense, there would be another
option here, which is, what would you have done if you had failed
your driving test? Which we'll be talking
about something in the past that didn't happen,
the third conditional. But these ones are the first
and the second conditional. And my other question, what's the difference between them?
What's the background? The first one, what will you
do gives the feeling that this person failing that test is something that really
could happen. Like that. There are a bad driver. But in the second one, it's more like a very
small possibility. So this person probably is pretty confident that
they're going to pass. Not totally sure, of course, because it's a driving test. You never know for sure. But they're pretty confident in the first one is a low level of confidence because
they really could fail. In the second one,
it's a high level of confidence because
probably they will pass. Now let's take a look
at a different type of quiz this time, I want you to find the mistakes
in these five sentences. So I'm just gonna give
you the sentences because if I read them for you, my brain will probably correct them into being correct and then you'll be able
to get the answer easily. So I'm not gonna
read them for you. I'm just going to let you
look at them yourself. And each of them has
some kind of mistake. I want you to write these
sentences in the correct way. Pause the video,
find those mistakes. Have a try now. Alright, let's take a look at some answers.
This is pretty tough So if you had forgotten
to pack my jewelry, I would have given it would
have goes with given. That's the Past participle, I will be able to replace the light bulb if
you hold the ladder. So hold is the present simple and it matches
the eye will be able. If I had traveled by train, I could have made it to
the interview on time. So this is the
third conditional, talking about
something in the past that we could have changed
on. Those can't change. In fact, it would be nice to be able to
change the past, right? But until right, up until now, we don't have that
technology. Who knows? Maybe in the future,
I wouldn't be able to replace the light bulb
if you held the ladder. So this is a tricky one
because you were probably looking at the word and
the health and thinking, well, these two
match each other. And so actually it was
just that replaced. We delete that deep and
we just have Replace. I wouldn't have gone
outside if it were raining. Now you've probably
thought, well, this must be the end of
the video because we've done a bunch of quizzes
already. But guess what? It's raining quizzes. There's more quizzes to
come. Let's do another one. Let's really test if you know these Conditionals
correctly. The thing is if you want
to master English grammar, you have to be able
to use things like the Conditionals
very accurately. And that's what
we're checking here. Can you use them accurately? So I want you to choose the correct ending for
each of these sentences. So you can see these
five sentences and these five endings. So pause the video, match them up now. Okay, let's take a
look at some answers. Hopefully you've had a try. If you had stayed consistent
with your exercise program, you would be even
fitter than you are. So notice the crucial words, had and would, Alright, you wouldn't be so
fit today if you had given up when you
want it to, alright. If you had spent less
money during your holiday, your budget wouldn't
be so tight. So it's spending money
to it must be budget. We know that and the head
matches the wouldn't. If we hadn't eaten
before we left, we might have arrived on time. And if I had given up, I wouldn't be as
successful as I am today. Now we're gonna do one
more type of quizzes. Well, and this one is more
like what you've been used to. This one is writing an ending. So I'm gonna give you
four sentence starts. You have to complete these
sentences however you want. You can be creative. The first one is,
if I had studied harder in school, Be
careful, look at that. Had studied if I were to
change an important decision. Had been born into
a wealthy family. Had I listened to my, grew up my y's
grandmother's advice. So pause the video and try to
write at least one ending. And if you can write two endings to each
sentence, have a tray. Now. Alright, let's take a
look at some possible answers. Of course, the answers
are almost unlimited, but here are two for each one. So if I had studied
harder in school, I might have got into my
first choice university, or I may have ended up in a
totally different career. If I were to change an
important decision, I wouldn't have studied law. I would have immigrated sooner had I been born
into a wealthy family. I wouldn't have had
to work so hard. I could have been
retired by now. Had I listened to my y's
grandmother's advice, I would be in a better
position than I am now. I probably wouldn't have
met my current wife. Never last thing that we
have to talk about with Conditionals is the
different ways we can use Conditionals
with Modal Verbs to change the literal feeling at the sentences
that were making. So let's take a look. First. We're gonna look at
the first conditional. So we can use
different Modal Verbs, change the meaning of these
conditional sentences. So for example, if I
study all weekend, I will pass my exams. We know this one already. We could replace
will with other, other Modal Verbs like Mount, may, should, or must. So if we changed that word will and put
those different ones, in, what effect would it have? If we said, well,
it means it's sure, it's certain it's guaranteed. I definitely will pass. If we say might, it means we have a
chance of passing, but it's definitely not certain. I might pass. I have a chance maybe 50, 50 May is the same feeling as mite, it's the same level. 5050 could means it's possible
but less likely than not. We might say it in this way. If I study all weekend, I could pass my exams. So we might say 30 or 40
per cent chance should. It's possible, and it's
more likely than not. So if I study all weekend, I should pass my exams. Probably we've got a 75 per
cent chance of passing. And finally, must means
like it's possible. And it's very, very important. And it gives us quite a strong feeling
like a 90 per cent, I must pass my exams. It's not absolutely definite. So we'll is a stronger
chance than must. But must is still pretty strong. I would say it would go should, must, and then we'll. We can also use Modal Verbs
with the second conditional. And again, the Modal
Verbs will change the meaning of the result. So if I studied all weekend, I would pass my exams. So if I studied and then would. So if we replace wood, we can bring in words
like might or could. And if we were to do
that, what would happen? If I studied all weekend? I might pass my exams. Again, it's like a
50 per cent chance, 5050, we're not really sure. And could, again is gonna be a little less than
the 50 per cent, maybe 30 or 40% chance. So again, we can
use either might or could if we're talking in
the second conditional. And finally, with the
third conditional, we again can use
different Modal Verbs. So here's the third
conditional version of that same sentence. If I had studied all weekend, I would have passed my exams. So we're talking here from
a time in the future, looking back and saying, well, I I really
wasted my weekend. I just slept or a partied or I did whatever
and I didn't study. So what we are looking
back and saying is, I made, I made a bad decision. Alright, so remember we're
at that point in the future, but we're saying I
would have passed and that means that
we're totally sure that if we had made a better decision to
study all weekend, the chance of passing was 100%, or at least very close
to 100 per cent. But of course, we
can change the would have and we can bring in either
might have or could have. So if we say might have, I might have passed my exams. Again, we're feeling like
it's maybe about 50, 50. And I could have
passed my exams, maybe a 5050 or a little
bit less than 5050. So when we're doing this
in the third conditional, we're looking to the
past and saying, what are the different
possible outcomes are different results if my action had been different
in the past and what are the different levels of
how likely it would be, would have passed very likely. Might have Past, sort of kind
of likely could have Past. There's a chance, but it's
definitely not guaranteed. So it changes that feeling
and that's something very important to be able to use to adjust your English in a very accurate
and a very natural way. So that is the end of our
section all about Conditionals. I hope that everything is
as clear as it can be. And if I could have
made it clearer, I would, I would have done ****, I should have prepared a better conditional
sentence anyway. So I hope that you've
found this useful. Of course, if you do
have any questions, please make sure to
send me a message. I'm very happy to help
with any confusion. And of course, as always, I'll be waiting for you with another topic in the
next video. See you then
36. Clauses Part 1: Welcome back. Let's
take a look at Clauses, which is a very important
thing to understand. If you want to have perfect English grammar,
let's get started. The first thing we need to
talk about the two words at the top, subject
and predicate. So Subject we talked
about quite a lot. Predicate we haven't
mentioned yet. First of all, what
are Grammar Clauses? A clause is a group of words
that make up a sentence. And Clauses contain a
subject and a predicate. In a clause, you can always see a relationship between the
subject and the predicate. Now that's a lot of words. So let's see some examples. But first, look in the yellow. A predicate is a group of
words that contains a verb. Look at the green. These modify or give information
about the subject. So look at this one. The meeting that is, our subject was the verb. Incredibly boring. Now, which Part here is giving information
about the subject? Which words or word are
getting information. And we know that those
must be the predicate. It's these three
is the whole part. So the subject is the meeting, the rest of the sentence there, the rest of that clause is the predicate was incredibly boring. Next one, the new secretary
will have to adapt quickly. So Subject blue, new
secretary, verb green, adapt. And there's the predicate.
So it's all of the will have to adapt quickly. And then the last one,
they're pretty easy. One, which is she cooked. Cooked, is our predicate. That is also just the verb. So this is true with the
subject and the predicate. If it's a long clause or if it's a clause of only two words. Now there are two types of Clauses that we
need to know about. We have independent
and dependent clauses. Let's take a look at the
difference between these two. This is very important
thing for grammar, and many people don't
understand this, and they make grammar
mistakes as a result. So let's focus, try and
get it clear as possible. So there are two main
types of Clauses. Independent clauses can
exist by themselves. They can stand in a
sentence by themselves, but dependent clauses need a, an independent clause as
part of the same sentence. So basically, dependent clauses can't stand by
themselves, alright? So if you write a
dependent clause and you don't add anything else, It's a Grammar problem. We'll see some examples shortly. Every sentence must have at
least one independent clause. Independent clauses, they
can exist by themselves. Here are some examples. I'm a receptionist at the hotel. It's a complete idea. It's a finished idea. There's nothing
that's left that we haven't dealt with,
nothing hanging around. It's a complete idea. The municipality band
fireworks on New Year's Eve. We could also say the
municipality band fireworks. That would also be complete. Francoise quit his job. All of these ones
are independent. They can all stand
by themselves. Let's take a look now
at dependent clauses, which can't stand by themselves. Now, see if you can notice what the problem is with these three. So what do these three have that the independent
clauses don't have. Let's take a look where you
went on honeymoon last year. As people complained about the noise because he doesn't
want to work anymore. So what's the problem? What is the issue? That means that these ones
are dependent clauses and can't be by
themselves in a sentence. It is those words alike
as and because and where. Those ones are connecting words. And they would very often connect to an
independent clause. But here they're not
connecting to anything. That, because what's before the because we don't know the
ads What's before that. Now, those three words
are the ones that change what could be
an independent clause. So for example, he doesn't
want to work anymore. That's a complete idea because he doesn't want to work
anymore is incomplete. We know that there's
something missing. So that's why it's dependent. And we can check this, this box. If you remove the
Conjunctions where, as, because, and so on, you can convert or change a dependent clause into
an independent clause, as long as it's
still makes sense, That's not always true. But in these examples,
it would be true. So if you're not sure or you get to the point in your writing
where you're thinking, this, this is a dependent
clause by itself. I have to write something else, write an independent
clause to go to it. And if there's nothing
that you can write, your other choice is to remove conjunction and make it a shorter but still complete idea, like the second one. People complained
about the noise. That would be
complete, that would be an independent clause. Another phrase you might
here is main clause. So the main clause is
what we call the central or the most important
part of the sentence. And this has like the main idea, the statement or the thoughts. It's like the reason that we write this sentence
is the main clause. All independent clauses are main Clauses because they
can exist by themselves. And sentences can have one. They can have more
than one main clause. So if it's one main clause,
it would look like this. I started a new job
earlier this month. That's just one main idea,
one independent clause. So it's our main clause. Look at this 12 main clauses. I started a new job this month and I relocated to a new city. So we've connected
them with end. And these are two main
ideas that we're trying to, trying to tell you in
this one sentence. So it's two main clauses. But if a sentence has a main clause and a
dependent clause, one that can't stand by itself, or maybe two or three
dependent clauses, then we call that a
complex sentence. So here's an example. I started a new job because I wanted
to earn more money. Now, of course, as we talked
about on the last slide, you could delete
because and make this into two individual sentences. You could say, I
started a new job, full stop period. New sentence. I wanted to earn more money. But of course we
want to make some of those longer sentences to
show our good Grammar. So because we have the word, because that conjunction that become that green part
becomes a dependent clause. And the yellow part is
still our main clause. It's our independent clause. And altogether, this
is a complex sentence. And knowing about the
different types of sentences is quite important. It's an important thing
to know the theory of so that we can have
perfect English grammar. So let's take a look at the
three types of sentences. So we can create different
types of sentences by combining independent
and dependent clauses. So as simple sentence
first of all, is just one independent clause. I'm a receptionist at the hotel. The municipality band
fireworks on New Year's Eve, Francoise quit his job. He's still quit his job. He hates that job. So each of these
is called a simple sentence because it only
has one independent clause. A compound sentence
is when we have two or more independent clauses. Now notice, this is a
longer type of sentence, but it's still made of independent clauses.
Let's take a look. I'm a receptionist at the hotel, but I don't like working there. So each of those, the green and the orange, are both independent clauses. They could stand by themselves if you just
made the sentence, I don't like working there
has also completely correct. It would be a simple sentence, but it would be a correct
sentence because it is independent. The same
for the next one. The municipality band
fireworks on New Year's Eve. And the new mayor agreed
with the decision. If you just said the new mayor
agreed with the decision, it would be a complete idea. Francoise quit his job and he doesn't want to work anymore. He really hates working, but he doesn't want
to work anymore. Independent clause. So two independent clauses together make a
compound sentence. Now, notice the words that are connecting those
compounds sentences we have, but we have end. Alright? Now, later
we'll look at a table that is
pretty important. And what you'll notice is
that that table doesn't have, but, or, and, or Alright, so we'll talk about
that in a few minutes. But these ones now our
compound sentences. And then the third
type of sentence is a complex sentence. So this is when we have one independent clause and one
or more dependent clauses, and we can see those in yellow. So the Football League
does not get postponed. That means the games are not
canceled when it is raining. Now, we can, we can see that the dependent clause
is when it is raining. If we just made a sentence, when it is raining, it wouldn't be complete. We can also switch
around the order. Even when it is raining. The Football League continues. Alright, so notice
though that if the dependent clause goes first and then the
independent clause is after, will usually add a comma. But we don't always have
to add a comma if it's the independent clause first and then the dependent
clause second. And we can also put the
dependent clause in the middle and separate
it with two commas. So the Football League, which takes place in an
indoor sports center, is not affected by rain, Wind. Now, the independent
clause is divided into, but it's still the
independent clause. So the Football League is not
affected by rain or wind. That is a complete idea. It's a complete sentence, but which takes place in an indoor sports center
is not a complete idea. You couldn't just write
which takes place in a, an indoor sports center and walk away and leave the
sentence, it would be wrong. So that one is our
dependent clause. So now that we know about independent and
dependent clauses, the important thing is to
know how to identify which, which Clauses or
dependent clauses. And a very useful
way to be able to do that is to look at
these Conjunctions. So this is that table I
was telling you about. So if a clause has any of these Conjunctions connecting it to another part of the sentence, then we know that it
is a dependent clause. And you can read these
ones by yourself. But what you'll notice is
that those words and for, NOR, but yet are all not there. So those are not included. That's why when we looked at
those compounds sentences, they used those words and, and, but to connect the two parts. So those ones are a
little bit different. But all of the
ones in this list, if you see them in a clause, it means that that is
a dependent clause. And you'll also
notice as you read through that on the second, in the second column, the second row down, we have so that, so that is different too. So, alright, so if it's just so, it can be part of a
compound sentence. But if it's so that
those two together, that becomes a
different conjunction. So that one is gonna
be a dependent clause. Let's do a quiz about these different pieces of sentences that we've
been talking about. So I want you to identify or
find the dependent clause, the independent
clause, and also the conjunction that joining
word in each sentence. And we can see an example. So the example is when you
walk the dog this morning. So our conjunction is when, and the dependent clause
is the yellow part, and then the rest of the
sentence is in blue. Notice as well we've used
a comma because we should separate the first
dependent clause. If it's first in the sentence, we make a comma and then we
put the independent clause. Remember to pick up
some laundry detergent on your way home for
cleaning clothes. So take a look at these three, and I want you to find those three parts and identify
them. Pause the video. Have a try now. Okay, welcome back. Let's take a look.
After the sunset. So our conjunction is after and the dependent is
after the sunset. It's not a complete
sentence, right? Let's grab a bite to eat
at the new restaurant. On the preliminary next one, we didn't manage to locate the phone number of
our previous supplier. That's our independent clause
because is our conjunction. They were liquidated
two years ago. That means that the company went bankrupt, it stopped existing. Finally, I'm feeling very
confident for the interview. Independent as conjunction. I recommend slightly
overqualified for the position. Okay, now, if it was just, I reckon I'm slightly
overqualified, then that would be an
independent clause, but it's connected to as, so that makes it dependent
37. Clauses Part 2: Now one thing to know
is that there are several types of
dependent clause, and we're going
to take a look at each of them one by one. Dependent clause
can be divided into several categories based
on their function, based on what they do. So first of all, we
have adjective clause, and these can modify or
change nouns or pronouns. Usually they start with who, which, whose, or that. That's kinda how
you'll know them. And they change or make
some change or modification to nouns or pronouns will see something in a minute adverbial. So based on adverb,
adverbial clause, and these are like an
adverb because they change the meaning of
verbs, adjectives, or sometimes other
Adverbs in the sentence, they tell us how
something happened. That's a good way to remember
how something happened, the way that something happened. Those are adverbial clauses. Next is conditional. So these are talking about when something might
happen in the future. And quite often they'll
use words like if, unless, noun clause, these
ones function like a noun. But when we need like several words to give
the idea of one thing. And so it's like a lot of words or sometimes
just a few words. And it acts like a noun in the sentence. Again,
we'll see some example. Finally, relative clause. And these identify the noun that they are referring
to are talking about. And they start again with
words like which, that, whom, whose, when,
where, or who. Those are the last ones
that we'll look at. So obviously that's a lot
of information to just go, hey, there you go. So we're going to take a
deeper look at each type. First, adjective
clauses, remember, these ones, modify, they
change nouns and pronouns. So here's an example. This is the restaurant that
I got food poisoning from. So the dependent clause, the orange bit, is talking
about the restaurants. You could also say,
this is the restaurant that makes really
delicious pizza. That would also be
a correct sentence. It would also be
adjective clause. Okay, here's the kind man who helped me replace my flat tire. I had a problem with the car
and he helped me to fix it. That's talking about the man. So it's an adjective clause. These are the kids
whose parents founded. The academy. Academy
is a type of school. Founded means to
start the next one. That's the dog. Bit me when we cycled past as a bad dog is a very bad
experience as well. Anyway. So all of the detail of the
that bit me when we cycled past is talking about the dog and it's changing
our idea of the dog. So that's an adjective clause. And the last one, Qatar, is the country that are cata. I'm not quite sure what is
the correct pronunciation? Qatar. Qatar. You can decide if you're from
Qatar or from Qatar. Send me a message and
let me know which is correct or maybe neither
of those is correct. Anyway. So that is the
country that were selected to host the 2022 FIFA World Cup. Alright, so all of that orange
is describing the country, okay, it's giving
us more details, letting us know the
whole situation. So let's do a quiz and practice using those
adjective clauses. So we're going to combine
two sentences into one. Let me give you an example. This is everyone. The people want to register
for the tournament. So it's two separate sentences, and we can use an adjective
clause like this. So these are all the people who want to register
for the tournament. Okay? So the orange part is that dependent clause,
the adjective clause. And it means we
can connect it all into one nice complex sentence. So I want you to do that
for these three sentences. Let's take a look. You can see Rotterdam Harbor
in the distance. It's one of the largest
and busiest in the world. Number two, JK Rowling wrote
the Harry Potter books. No more Harry Potter
books are planned. Sadly, my watch can
be submerged up to 1.5 m. That means
put underwater. The watch was a gift
from my mother. Okay. So I want you
to do the same. I want you to take each of those two sentences and
turn them into one. Very nice,
grammatically correct, complex sentence with
an adjective, clause. Pause, have a try. Now Alright, let's take a look. The first one, you can
see Rotterdam Harbor, which is one of the largest
and busiest harbors in the world over
in the distance. And notice we've got
the comma before, the comma after our
dependent clause, which is the darker green. Alright, so that we get JK
Rowling and Harry Potter. Jk Rowling, calmer, who wrote
the Harry Potter series, comma, has announced that no more Harry Potter books had
been planned or unplanned. My watch can be submerged. The watch that my mother gave me can be submerged
in water up to 1.5 m. So those are three ways that we can turn two
sentences into one nice, grammatically correct,
complex sentence. The next type of clause
that we should look at is an adverbial clause. Remember, these are
like an adverb, so they change verbs, adjectives, or other Adverbs in a sentence and they tell
us how something happened. So usually they give
information about how, when, where, or why something
happened. Here's some examples. I will start studying when
I have finished eating. Alright, so when will
the studying happen? After I finished eating? Payment was delayed due
to a software error. So this time due to is the way that we connect
into that clause. And it's saying about
why payment was delayed. And then where were you
when the burglary occurred? Burglary is like when
someone breaks into your house and steal
something from your house, the person who does
it is a burglar. The same spelling but know why. Anyway, that part
is talking about the time when this
thing happened. So let's practice making
some adverbial clauses. We've got an example,
9th of November 1989, the Berlin, Berlin
Wall was knocked down. And we can make a full sentence, 9th of November 1999 is when the Berlin Wall
was knocked down. Alright? So it's telling us
when that thing happened. So I'm gonna give you
33 pairs of sentences. And again, you're
going to combine those sentences using
an adverbial clause. So the first one there it is, sick, Mary left work early. Number to the cleaners
have not finished steam cleaning the
office curtains. There is time to go for a walk. And three, accept a project. You must complete the project. Those are not very
good sentences, but you're going to make
them into an instruction. So you know what
I want you to do. Pause the video and have a try at making those
three sentences now. Okay, welcome back. So marius sick,
married leftward. This is a very complicated one. It doesn't have to
be so complicated, but I wanted to
give you something that was a little bit longer. So Mary left work at 3PM
because she has been feeling sick all week and has a doctor's appointment
at 03:30 P.M. alright. So a couple of different adverbial clauses that two reasons why she left. She has been feeling sick and she has that doctor's
appointment. The next one about the cleaners, we could go for a walk while the cleaners finished steam
cleaning the office curtains. Notice that because the
dependent clause is second, we don't need the
comma this time. Except a project. You must
complete the project. You must complete your projects
whenever you accept them
38. Clauses Part 3: The next type of
clause to look at is a conditional clause. Now we have a whole section all about conditional sentences, which if you haven't
watched it already, you should definitely watch
that very useful section. I think I like that section. Anyway. Conditional clauses show it when something might
happen in the future. Generally they're
going to use if or unless as their Conjunctions. In conditional sentences
like the whole sentence, usually there are two parts. The conditional clause is usually just the
if and a verbal, unless and a verb, maybe when and a verb. And that's true for all
of the conditional forms. That's the zero, first,
second, and third. Now the tense of that
verb can change. Alright, and we're
going to review that briefly in a moment. But usually that is the
conditional clause. It's the part that has
the if or the unless, and that's the dependent clause. So let's quickly look
at zero conditional. Remember this is how we form it. We have if or when we have the action in the
present simple, we have a comma and
we have the results. So the result is usually
an independent clause. And this part is the
dependent clause. And the same if it's the
other way round if result is first and then if or
when, and then the action. This part would be
the dependent clause. And of course refer to the
section on Conditionals. If you want to review. For the first conditional,
it looks like this. We have if and then we have the action in the
present simple. And then the result is
will, may, or might. But again, the if part is our dependent clause,
our conditional clause. And the same for if it's
the other way round. For the second conditional, the logic is the same. Remember second conditional, this part will have
the Past Simple, and that's the
conditional clause. And again, the other way round, if the conditional
clause is second, it's going to be
that area as well. Then the third conditional
is the one that uses the past perfect, had
done something. Again, it's going to be that
section and that section. So we're not going
to do too much on conditional clauses here. You can go and watch
that whole section about Conditionals if
you want to review. But just remember that
the dependent clause is the one that has
the if and the verb. Let's now take a look
at noun clauses. So these are ones that
come up quite often and they function as a noun. But usually we think about
a noun as one word, right? These ones are several words, but that's still talk
about one thing. They create one
thing in a sentence. It's when more than one word is needed to describe the noun. So we're going to take a look at four or five examples starting from a fairly short noun clause. You can see it in orange. Later we'll get a
much longer one. So he made his opinion about
plagiarism. Very clear. Plagiarism is copying
someone else's work in a cheating way, not telling people that
you're copying their work. So his opinion is, our noun clause is
a very short one. Or we could say what he said about plagiarism
was very clear. So that one is a three
word noun clause. It's still one thing. What he said. I don't have his contact
details anymore, so I can think about
his contact details. It's still one thing, isn't it? It's one item, but we need
several words to describe it. That's a noun clause. I don't know how anyone
can contact him. So again, if we took this and
put it in his own sentence, how anyone can contact him. It's not a complete sentence, so it's a dependent clause. And it's talking about, a noun is talking about the way that people can
contact this person. Then finally, an
even longer one. We sent a letter to whoever is staying in his
previous apartment. So think about that. That's talking about one person, whoever is staying in
his previous apartment. It's one to the river
as a seven words, but it's still just
talking about one person. We sent a letter to that person, whoever is staying
in his apartment, asking for his contact details. So let's do a little bit of practice of those noun clauses. So here's an example of
what I want you to do. Again, going to give
you two sentences Going to combine them into one and try to use
a noun clause. This is quite hard, so we don't know
the doctor's name. The Dr. sent the invoice
for the appointment and we can turn this into the
Dr. whatever his name was, centres the invoice
from the appointment. So here are your two
challenges. We have. She was talking, I
couldn't hear her and Gabrielle applied
for a new job. We don't know what
the job involves. So I want you to try
to turn those into one sentence using
a noun clause, pause and do your best. Now. So let's take a look
at some answers then. She was talking. I
couldn't hear I couldn't hear what she was talking about. Alright. So the what she
was talking about is a dependent clause
and it's talking about the words coming from
her mouth. Just one thing. So it's a noun clause. And the second one,
we don't know what Gabrielle is new job involves. So again, the responsibilities
of gabriella, new job. That's the thing that noun that we are
talking about here, and we don't know what it is. Finally, the last type of
clause that we have to look at more carefully is
a relative clause. So these identify the noun
that they're referring to, that they're talking about. And they start with
a relative pronoun. So when I say identify, I mean like give more
information and make it clear to kinda go deeper in
detail about that Nouns. They often use words
like which, that whom, whose, when, where, or
who. See an example. My research has focused
on which factors most influence carbon
dioxide emissions. Pretty complicated. One, the new restaurant
that I heard about sounds like
a FUN excursion. Excursion is like when you
go out to do something. So if we just say
the new restaurant, Which one are we talking about? We say that I heard about or
which is on the next street, then we are sort of identifying exactly
which restaurant it is. Detectives are investigating
the fingerprints of the person who broke
in last night. If we just said the
fingerprints of the person, again,
we don't know. So we need to add more
details using who to figure out
exactly which person that detectives are
trying to find. Have the police still
not located the weapons which were used to gain
entry to the building. So again, it's could
be any weapons? No, it's not. It's
specifically these weapons that were used to get
into the building. So those are called
relative clauses. And as we've done with all of the other types of
Clauses, guess what? I want you to do a quiz. I want you to have a try
and make me some single complex sentences from
these two sentences that I'll give you our example. I spoke with all
the people here. They have all been
affected by layoffs. Layoffs means when a company
decides to fire or let go, a lot of workers
at the same time. I spoke with all the people who have been
affected by layoffs. Three for you to work on. I grew up in this town. It was quite a rural place
with not many inhabitants. My time and Columbia, did I ever tell you about it? That one you'll have to change around and add a few new words. We used to live in Hong Kong. Hong Kong is very
densely populated. So take these three pairs of sentences and make them
into single sentences. Pause, have a try now. Okay, let's take a little look. So the first one about
my town where I grew up. The town where I grew up
doesn't have many inhabitants. Not many people live that
my time in Columbia. Did I ever tell you what happened when I
went to Columbia? Finally, Hong Kong. We used to live in Hong Kong, which is a very densely
populated city. There we go. We've got three nice
complex sentences with perfect English grammar. So that is what we're going
to talk about for Clauses. I hope this was useful. Of course, feel free
to come back and watch this set of videos as
many times as you want. And of course, send me a message
of anything isn't clear. And I'll be waiting for you with more videos in the
future. See you there.
39. Adverbs Adjectives Part 1: Welcome back. In this
series of videos, we're going to look at Advanced
adjectives and adverbs. And we're going to start
by looking at Adverbs, in particular, something
called adverbs of degree. Now, what are adverbs of degree? They are Adverbs that
can make an adjectives meaning stronger or weaker. They change how strong or
weak the adjective is. Not all Adverbs can
be used in this way. We'll see some later
that can't be used. Adverbs of degree can
only be paired and they be put together with certain
types of adjectives as well. Those ones are called
gradeable Adjectives. Gradeable is like, when your
teacher gives you a grade, how good was your homework? Was it an a, was it a, B, C, so it can go up or down. The grades and Adjectives. Some Adjectives are the same. And we're going to see
a few examples now, and we'll talk a lot more
about them a little bit later. But we call the
Adverbs that can go with gradeable Adjectives,
grading Adverbs. Let's see some examples. That's a lot of words, right? So we can see on the left of this table the
change in meaning, how strong or how like, how very these things are. And it goes from very, very at the top down to like, not very or not at
all at the bottom. And the Adverbs
are in the middle. So we have extremely,
very, really, remarkably, fairly
quiet, slightly, not very, not particularly. And then barely at the bottom, barely is like if we're
talking about percentages, it's not zero per cent, but it might be maybe three per cent or
something like that. Then the adjectives
that we can use here, and there are lots more, but these are some
examples we have dangerous kind, attracted,
healthy, confident, certain nauseous, which means
like you feel a bit sick, funny, tasty and edible. Edible means you
can eat that thing. It's not dangerous to eat it. So all of these ones, we can move them up or down. We can change how
strong they are. For example, if you said something was
extremely dangerous, That's a very
different meaning to not very dangerous or
not particularly day. So these Adjectives
are gradeable. We can change how
strong they are. So we're gonna get started with some practice straightaway. So we've got some
grading Adverbs and some gradeable Adjectives. And we're going to
write some sentences, some positive, some
negative statements, and some questions as well. Let's take a look at the table. So we have the Adverbs that I want you to use on the left, and then the Adjectives
that I want you to pair with them on the right. Now, you can mix and
match if you want, for example, you don't have
to say extremely dangerous. You could match
extremely with extremely attractive or
extremely confident. But these ones are good, matches the ones that
I've given you here. So it's a safe place to start. And we can see some examples. Remarkably. He's remarkably
healthy for his age. It means like always
very healthy, like very surprising
how healthy hears. And then not particularly. These bagels aren't
particularly tasty. So they are not, they aren't particularly tasty. So now I want you to pause
the video and try to make me, or how many eight more sentences using those other
adverbs and adjectives? Pause and have a try
now. Okay, welcome back. Let's take a little look
at some possible answers. So here we go. Extremely. Driving on ice is extremely dangerous
because you could crash. Very, is she a very kind person? Alright. Know she
she's horrible. Now I'm sure she is
a very kind person. Really. Those jackets are
not really attractive. Okay. Remarkably, he's
remarkably healthy, fairly, I'm fairly confident
it won't rain today. Here's where you see
that the feeling, it starts to change from
extremely down to remarkably. It's quite a strong feeling, but then fairly is
significantly weaker. So I would say fairly
confident means about maybe 65 per
cent confident. So not very confident, but more than half. I'm fairly confident Quite an, Are you quite
certain it won't rain? Quite as an
interesting one here, because it can be
used in two ways. It can be used in a way of very, you can say, I'm quite certain. But if you ask it like a
question or if you say it, you match it with a word like, like good, it could be something that's kind
of 50 or 60 per cent. These are quite good. So if we say these are quite good with that tone of voice, these are quite good. It means they're not good. If you imagine the
level good is here, quite good as a
little bit under it. So quite is one that you
have to be careful with. Because it can mean
two different things depending on the
tone of your voice. Then we have slightly, Lucy is slightly nauseous. Not very, you are not very
funny. Not particularly. The bagels still
aren't particularly tasty and barely the
food was barely edible. That means it was not totally inedible like
we could still eat it, but only just like we were almost feeling sick
after eating it, it was barely edible. We've looked at the
grading Adverbs and you might not be very
surprised to hear that the opposite of those is non grading Adverbs were not very good at making of interesting names
in English grammar. Non grading Adverbs, unlike grading Adverbs that
we just looked at, can only be used with non
gradeable Adjectives. Alright? Non grading Adverbs basically have the feeling of completely or almost completely
like 100% or maybe 95%. And we can see some
examples here. And you're going to try to
make some sentences with them. Set. Some of the
most common ones. If we're talking about 100%, you can see that one on
the left under completely, so absolutely,
entirely, thoroughly, utterly, perfect,
totally or wholly. Those ones all have the feeling
of like 100% completely. And then on the other, in the other column
on the right, we have almost completely, we have nearly, largely, practically, virtually,
almost essentially. And mostly. And those
all have the feeling of, I would say at
least 90 per cent, maybe not 95, but at
least 90, up to 100. Okay? So you might say, I got practically
all of the answers, right, then you might have
got 95 out of 100 answers. Okay? So what I want you to
do now is to pause this video again and choose maybe
four or five of these, some from the completely column and some from the almost
completely column. And make me some sentences. So pause, have a tray. Now. Welcome back. Hopefully you've had a tribe. What you'll notice
is that I didn't give you any Adjectives to use. We're going to look more at some good Adjectives
choices a little bit later in this
series of videos. But let's take a
look at some now. The first two I want to
give you as an example. So the doughnut is
perfectly round. Okay? So that's just one donut. And it's totally round. Round is our adjective here. And that is a non
gradeable adjective. So you can't say it's half
round or something like that. It's either totally,
completely round or it's almost drowned, or it's just, we don't
use the word round, it becomes a different shape. So we have the
completely perfect one. The doughnut is perfectly round. Or if you're looking
at like six doughnuts and four or five of them are perfect and
one is almost per, you can say the donuts
are mostly round. Another one, yesterday's exam
was virtually impossible. Virtually impossible. Not totally,
completely impossible, but very close to
being impossible. And this is another example. You couldn't say it was a bit impossible or kind of
impossible or quite impossible. It wouldn't make sense. It's, something is
impossible or it's not. Nadal was thoroughly
beaten by Federer. You can't be half beaten. You are beaten or
you're not beaten. Nadal was thoroughly beaten. And that's adding
more emphasis to say, not just beaten, but
very clearly beaten. Federal won the
game very easily. Those chocolates are
almost entirely sugar. So here we've got to actually, we've got almost and
we've got entirely. So this means they
are about 95% sugar. Almost the entire
class failed the exam, almost the entire class, and make a note of that Grammar. We don't say almost
entirely the class. We say almost the entire class. The judge's ruling
the judge's decision was wholly unfair
to the defendant. It was wholly unfair,
like completely unfair. And the last one,
your child's behavior was entirely unacceptable. So again, unacceptable
is a great example of a non-degradable Adjectives
because something can't be like half unacceptable
or a bit unacceptable. It's unacceptable
or it's acceptable. There's no middle ground. So that one is non degradable
40. Adverbs Adjectives Part 2: Now let's take a look at such. And so because many
people get these confused and we're
going to take a long, very deep look and do a lot of practice of these two words. So get ready. I promised that
at the end of this section, you will feel super confident
and you'll have lots of great ways to use such. And so to make very
sophisticated, very high level sentences. So let's get started. How do we use so and such? We're going to take a look
at some examples first, but the important
thing is that both of them are used
to add emphasis. Now, such can be used before noun. That's
very interesting. That's something that is
a little bit unusual. Grammatically speaking. We'll see some
examples in a minute. And we can also particularly
with the words, so we can use the word that later in the
sentence to add a result, and you'll see those
ones in green. So remember that both of
them are adding emphasis. The first one, the
product launch, was such a success. So that means it was
a very big success. Notice what comes after
such it's a success. So not the Project
was such successful. The adjective,
success is a noun. That's the important
thing. It was so dangerous to drive at night
that they closed the road. So the the so is making the
dangerous even stronger, so strong that we
get the results. They closed the road. And notice that dangerous
is an adjective. So dangerous, the air is
so much cleaner here. So this is like so much cleaner. We're comparing two things. So much cleaner here
than back home. My car is so new that there isn't one speck
of dust inside. Sadly, that's not true for me. My car is extremely dirty, embarrassingly
dirty. I would say. This is this is
more what I would like to be true,
maybe in the future. So my cart is so new,
again, new Adjectives. Michael's studied so intensely
that he got a headache. So the that is the result. Notice what we're using. So with this time, what type of word is that? Intensely is an adverb. So we can put so
with an adverb as well to make that
adverb even stronger. So it's not just studied, it's not just studied intensely. It studied so intensely. So it's like two levels up
from just normal study. And that's a great
example of using. So then we have a
long one to finish. Working from home is so
much more efficient. And we'll see how to make a little Clauses like
that a little bit later. So much more efficient than
the old way of working that the Executive
decided to make it a permanent option for all staff. So homework is the new norm. On the previous page, we saw some different
examples of different sentence
structures using a lot using so one of them
using Such as well. And now we're going
to try and practice all of those different types
and a few more as well. So we're going to
start with two. The first one is such, the article and a noun, just like we saw such a success. So the product launch
was such a success. So you can see the
details of before. We have such, we have
the article, of course, that could be an if the noun begins with
a vowel with AEIOU, and then the noun is success. Alright, so such a success. Then we have another
one as well, which is even more complicated. But again, it's gonna give
you lots of flexibility with your grammar, such
article, adjective. And then now the product
launch was such an there's the article inspiring our
adjective and success again. Alright, such an
inspiring success. Your challenge is
to try to write three sentences with
each of those two. So in total it's going
to be six sentences. And for the second formula, the one with the adjective, tried to use these Adjectives. Explicit, meaning, very clear, exquisite, very
high-quality, and delicate. Like it can break easily, but also the feeling
of high-quality So pause and make
me six sentences. Have a try now. Okay, let's take a look at some possible answers
for the first one. How Cristiano Ronaldo is still a superb footballer at his
age is such a mystery. That's a very common one. Something is such a mystery
like we don't know. There's no way to,
no way to know. It's very surprising. You have such an eye for detail, such an I and again, such an I4, something
such an eye for fashion, such an eye for design, such an eye for talent. That's a quite a
common little chunk that you can use it English, buying a smartwatch
was such a waste, or you could say such
a waste of money. Again, such a waste of time, such a waste of money, such a waste of energy. Very common, very
natural English. Also I agree, I smartwatch, I'm not very impressed
by smartwatches. I must say. The next one, such article, adjective, noun. Thank you. That was such an explicit explanation
of how the machinery works. Such an explicit explanation. You do have to be a little
bit careful with that word, explicit because it can be used as well for like in movies. If there's a lot of
adults material, you know what I'm talking about? They they would use
that word explicit. So don't use this one too often and be careful
when you use it. But the meaning, the base meaning of explicit
is very clear, very easy to see or
easy to understand. Such explicit explanation,
explanation is our noun. That is, such an
exquisite carpets. So it's really nice,
It's very high-quality. Look at the precision
of the embroidery, and please be careful when
you bring the vars in. These are such delicate flowers. This time we haven't
used the article because it's more
than one flowers. There's an S, such
delicate flowers. Now let's have a try at
making some sentences with. So again, we're going to look
at two different formulas. The first one is so and an adjective, it's
relatively simple. So our apartment is so cozy, that's just a regular adjective. But we're also going to do
a more complicated one. So much and a
comparative adjective. So remember those ones. If you don't remember
how to make those ones, go back to the Review
section where we talk about, we talk about how to make
those comparative Adjectives. Our department is so much
easier than this one. So cozy with them is our
comparative adjective. Remember that means we
are looking at two things and saying which one is more, something like better,
bigger, smaller, smelly, more beautiful,
or whatever it is. Okay, so you're going to make, again three sentences
for each six in total. And try to use the second
formula with lavish, like very expensive, very
luxurious, spacious, a lot of space and extravagant like where
you've spent a lot of money or brought in a lot of
resources to do something. Pause and have a try at
those six sentences. Nap. Okay, let's take a look. The first one there,
apartment is so lavish. Alright, It's very nice,
very expensive apartments. Ours is so spacious
though. Ours is. You've got a lot of space.
It might it might be empty space because
we haven't got any chairs or any furniture. But there's a lot of space. The Deco is so extravagant. Deco means the decoration. So they might have like diamonds on the
walls or something. Maybe they're talking about
like visiting a palace. Although a palace
is also spacious, probably just someone's house. Anyway. We don't need to
analyze it too deeply. So much and comparative
adjectives. So this is the harder one. The opera house is
so much more lavish than we expected or than
we expected it to be. So take a look. It's not lavish or lavish, just it's so much more lavish. Lavish is one of those words
that only has two syllables, but still we don't say lavish. We say much more lavish. Okay? So it's so much more
lavish than we expected. The interior of the
car is so much more spacious than it appears
from the outside. So it's surprisingly spacey,
spacious, roomy inside. The outfits at the
Grammy Awards are so much more extravagant
than they need to be. So they are like just crazily extravagant dresses made of gold and
things like that.
41. Adverbs Adjectives Part 3: The next two structures
that we're going to look at both use Adverbs. So we're going to use
so and then adverb. So we can see a very common
example here, are nice. Did so well in her
finals, in her exams. So it's so well is the adverb, alright, so we'll see some example Adverbs that you
can use a little bit later. But remember that, well, is not an adjective. It's irregular adverb. And here's the interesting part. We're also going
to make sentences with a comparative adverb. So we're using so much
and a comparative adverb. So we have the exam went
so much better than. So remember something,
we do something well, we do something better
than someone else, or we do something the best. So much better than
we were expecting. So we expected the
exam to be like this. Actually, it was really good. So it was so much better
than we were expecting. Now I want you again to try
six sentences in total. And I want you to use these three Adverbs
for both of your sets. So you're going to
use courageously, like bravely, enthusiastically. And defiantly. Defiantly means like, you won't let other people
tell you what to do. It could be a good
thing or a bad thing. Like if you are a parent
and your child is behaving quite defiantly,
that's not good. You want your child
to behave better. But it could be like
a brave soldier was fighting defiantly against
evil or something. Okay. So I haven't got a very good way of
telling those stories, fighting against
evil or bad people. Anyway, I'm sure
your imagination will be much better than mine. Pause and try to make
me six sentences now. Okay, welcome back. Let's take a look at
the so and adverb ones. The firemen acted
so courageously, so courageously, not
just courageously, even more so courageously. The puppy was trying to play
with me so enthusiastically. And you could add
that afterwards. No results like so
enthusiastically that it bent my finger and
I had to cut my finger off. But enthusiastically as a
good like it's a happy thing. We can imagine a puppy
playing like that. Then sentence three,
Steven, my youngest, that means my youngest
child or my youngest son walked away so defiantly when
I told him it was bedtime. So he was really not happy
to have to go too bad. Then we have so much and
a comparative adverb. So here's the challenge,
the away team. So that's like in sports, when the team comes to
visit the home team, the away team
played so much more courageously than
the home team dead. So much more courageously. Okay. My partner was greeted so much more
enthusiastically than I was. So it could be like when you've come home
and you're puppies. The puppies more excited to see one person than
the other person. The neighbor's cat
behaves so much more defiantly than usual
when I'm house sitting. So we're comparing
the neighbor's cat normally and then
the neighbor's cat when I'm how settings. So it's much more defiance
when I'm how setting. We're gonna go back
to such now and we're going to take a look at
this type of sentence. We have such article,
noun and that. And we're gonna look at some,
some interesting nouns. So the exhibition will be such a spectacle that the
Gallery will bookers again. So we're adding
the result again, such as the thing that
we looked at before, such a and then a noun. And then we're adding
that plus the results. So I want you to make
me three sentences, and I want you to
use these Nouns, celebration, disaster,
disappointment. Try and make me three
interesting sentences using this formula. And these three Nouns, pause, have a try. Now. Okay, let's take a look. So we will have
such a celebration that the entire neighborhood
will want to join. Notice that we are matching. Our tense at the start is we will have and
then at the end, the neighborhood
will want to join. By the way, notice again, a neighborhood is the area. Many people get confused between the words neighborhood
and neighbor. Neighbor is a person. I talked to my neighbor about. The loud music. And neighborhood is the
whole area around you The launch of the new
website was such a disaster. This is such a natural phrase, by the way, really, really good. Such a disaster that
the department had terminated the contract with
the web development agency. So basically he
fired the agency. The latest Modal
released by Tesla was such a disappointment that the company is now planning to scrap production entirely. Scrapped means to cancel, to scrap the production, scrap the sale of
this new product. Now if you thought that last
set of sentences was hard, Let's take a look at this one. So this one is such
article, adjective, noun. And that we can see
down at the bottom. This is such a long sentence where to put it at the bottom. The new model is
such an abysmal. Abysmal is our adjective here. It means really, really bad, terrible, such an
abysmal failure. And that's how a noun that the executives want
to scrap the Project. Alright, so that
the difference here is that we're adding in a, an adjective that can really give our sentence a
bit more character, a bit more color, and feeling. I want you to try and
write three sentences for me using these Adjectives, the noun, you can choose, that these are the Adjectives definitely like really loud, excruciating that can
be very painful or something that's very like
embarrassing or uncomfortable, like talking about sex with your parents or
something like that. Alluring. That means very attractive are very interesting. It attracts people to
find out more about it. So try to make me three sentences with
these three Adjectives. Pause, have a try now. Okay, let's take a look
at some possible answers. So we have at the airport, I had such a deafening roar
from a nearby jet taking off that notice that the that is
much later in the sentence this time that I had to cover
my ears until it was gone. So R4 is a big loud noise. It can be the noise that
a lion makes or a tiger. And it can also be the noise
of a very loud engine. Or it could be an explosion, a bomb going off, such a deafening roar. The patient was in such excruciating pain
that the Dr. put him on a drip with powerful painkillers such and then the
adjective excruciating. And that describes the
now, which is pain. He was in such pain, the actress had such an
alluring personality and sense of humor that she
was hired on the spot. That means like in that
moment, immediately
42. Adverbs Adjectives Part 4: Let's come back out of
such and go back into so. And we're going to add some of those details with the
result at the end with that, we're using so Adjectives
that plus a result. Property in New York is so
expensive that what happened, the mayor instituted a rent cap. So he put a limit on how
expensive rent could be. So I want you to write me some sentences using
these Adjectives, stimulating, exotic,
and therapeutic. Alright? Now if you don't
know the meaning of those, make sure you check them. I'm gonna give you that
challenge and I want you to make me some sentences
using that formula. So the adjective
that and a result, pause, have a try. Now. Okay, Let's see some examples. So we have looking at a
computer screen all day is so stimulating that I often struggled to fall
asleep at night. Now, take a look at
the first part there. So the subject of this sentence is a phrasal nouns
and noun phrases, looking at a computer
screen all day. All of that is our Subject and then the verb is,
is so stimulating. And then our result. Cuisine in the area might be so exotic that the kids will
refuse to eat anything. Now in this case, exotic means very different
to what you're used to. It because of the result, it has a negative feeling here, but it can also have a
very positive feeling like We visited all
kinds of exotic places. That's like has a
very positive feeling of we saw things that were quite different from
our normal life. So exotic can go both ways,
positive or negative. And the last one, those
muscle relaxants was so therapeutic that
I fell asleep on the couch right after dinner
with all the lights on. So they were extremely relaxing. In this case, therapeutic
means relaxing. Now we're going to make it
even more complicated and do so much a comparative
adjective and a result. So let's take a
look at an example. The staff are so
much friendlier than back home that we tipped
them all generously. Alright, we've even
got an extra adverb in there at the end, generously. So we're saying so much, we're saying that
comparative adjective. So it could be with an ear or an array
or a more something. And then we're saying
we're including the van. Remember we need a van and of
that so much more friendly, so much friendlier,
then back home. So that's our comparison, that, and then we
give the results. So pretty complicated,
these ones. Let's see if you
can get them right. Three words I want you to use reasonable, secretive,
and nutritious. Nutritious means
like Good for you. It's got lots of the things that your body
needs to be healthy. Those are the Adjectives
that I want you to use as comparative adjectives. Now, take your time
with this one. Don't rush it. This
is quite a challenge. Pause. Make me three sentences. Now. Let's take a
look at some choices. Living costs are so much more reasonable here that we are
thinking about emigrating. Now notice that this time
we didn't include the van, but there is a Advanced
suggested and again, it's them back home or in our hometown or in
our home country. So the very long version
would be living costs are so much more reasonable here than in our home country that we are thinking
about emigrating. But we don't always
have to include the van if the meaning is clear. And here it's clear. In other situations
it might not be. But here it's clear
that we're comparing our home country and the
country that we might move to. Next one, Jonathan is so much
more secretive than anyone else I've met that I often wonder what's
going on in his life. Now here, if we didn't have the van and anyone
else I've met, we wouldn't really know
what we were comparing two, we might think that
we were comparing to Jonathan in the past or
maybe to Jonathan's brother Or to the person who's
talking like maybe than me. So this is a situation
when we do need to keep the van and be more explicit
to say it more clearly. The last one,
home-cooked meals are so much more fulfilling. That means like they
make you feel happy and full and healthy and nutritious than anything you can
buy at a store that we are considering only
eating out twice a month. So that we get,
our result is that we're thinking about making
a change in our lives. Let's take a look at so an adverb and then
that with a result. So this is some
interesting ones. I think the waiter popped
the champagne bottle. That's like championing of
like in in Formula One. When they win a
race and they get the champagne and
spray it on everyone. The way to pop the
champagne bottle. So suddenly big surprise that everyone shrinked
with surprise. As shriek is like a
like kind of noise, like a scream or like a very
angry and scared shout. Shriek was a good,
good word for you. So suddenly that, that's
the important part. So an adverb. And then that. Let's try and use these Adverbs. So we have awkwardly, gracefully and
sympathetically pause, try to make me three
sentences. Now. Let's take a little look. I asked my crush out so awkwardly that she
blushed as well. Alright, so it was so awkward that not only was I embarrassed, she was embarrassed as well. Fortunately, she refused so gracefully that I didn't feel too bad about being rejected. Afterwards, my friends
treated me so sympathetically that I felt a bit embarrassed
that they watched. So here we've got to that. You can see the, the, the result is after
the first bet, not the second that it's the
I felt a bit embarrassed. That one is our results. The other one is just
some extra detail. And the very last part of this
very long section on such. And so that we're
going to look at is this one so much
comparative adverb that we've piled everything on. This is the most complicated
set. So here's an example. Birth rates are falling
so much more rapidly that politicians are concerned
Western Europe will face a democratic
demographic crisis. Now, you can also include, I'm a van in the middle. So here if you were
including event, it would be something like
so much more rapidly than expected or so much more rapidly than in other parts
of the world. But if you don't
feel it's necessary, then you don't
have to add a van. Only add it if it adds clarity, if it makes your
sentence clearer. Let's take a look.
We're going to write sentences with these three
Adverbs effortlessly. That's like, seems so easy, seems like almost no trouble, even though maybe it is trouble. Cautiously, very carefully and reassuringly reassure
someone means to make them feel better, to stop them from worrying. Pause, and take
your time and try to make me these
three sentences. And let's take a look
at some answers. The first one, famous
musicians play their instruments so
much more effortlessly. Now notice, effortlessly
is the adverb, and that's connected all the way back in the sentence to play. Those two are not
next to each other, but effortlessly is
talking about play. Alright? This is, this is what Advanced English
grammar is like. So much more effortlessly. And also notice it's
more effortlessly. It's not effortlessly. And if you're not
sure about that, watch our review video
about Adverbs so much more effortlessly than the rest of us that they make
everything look easy. Alright, this time we included
a van than the rest of us. And that, that is our result. My business partner invests
so much more cautiously than anyone that we call him the top choice because he
moves very, very slowly. We've got so much and then
we've got more cautiously. That's our comparative
adverb than a comparison. And then that plus the result. The nurse gave the
medical results so much more reassuringly than the Dr. that we actually don't want the Dr.
to give the results anymore. Now, this would be
a situation when we wouldn't need to have the van. Let's take a look
so we could say the nurse gave the medical
results so much more reassuringly that we actually don't want the Dr. to
give the results anymore. Why do we not have
to put the can? Because we mentioned who the person is later
in the sentence. So we mentioned the comparison. So we wouldn't
necessarily need to say than the Dr. because we
mentioned the Dr. later, it's clear that the nurses better at giving the
results than the Dr. so that is our section all about such and so so and such. It has been such a long, such a long section that you're probably
sick of it by now. You're probably so sick of it that you want to move
on to something else. I should have prepared
these sentences anyway. As I told you at the start, I think that this has been something that hopefully
is very useful for giving you a
lot of variety and flexibility to make
really natural, quite complicated
English sentences and very high level grammar. So I hope you feel the same and we're gonna move on and talk
about something else now
43. Adverbs Adjectives Part 5: As I promised you long time
ago, several videos ago, we're gonna take
a deeper look at gradeable and
non-degradable Adjectives. Now, let's try and remember what our gradeable adjectives, they are the ones
that can be graded. Remember like, like a homework, like your teacher marking
your homework and telling you a or
B or C. They can go up and down in how strong they are and they're
graded using an adverb. Alright? And that shows how strong the strength
of the adjective. So for example,
the iPhone Pro Max is extremely expensive. Alright, so expensive
as our adjective. And we can adjust or change how strong that Adjectives
is using extremely, which is the adverb. Another one, the iPhone
Pro is very expensive. Very is still up here, but extremely is even stronger. The iPhone 14 plus
is pretty expensive. So again, it's gone a
little bit down again. And the iPhone six is
not very expensive. And we can also use these adjectives and
other tensors as well. For example, the iPhone 15
will be extremely expensive, or the iPhone 13 was
also very expensive. And these adjectives
that are gradeable, we know it's only a
limited number of them. Not every adjective
is gradeable. In a minute, we're
going to look at some of the ones that aren't gradeable, the
non-degradable ones. But you basically
have to remember through practicing,
through getting feedback, through reading,
paying attention, remember which Adjectives
are gradeable, so they can get
stronger or weaker. Which ones are non-degradable? Which ones we can't
change the strength of. What I'd like you to do
as little challenge, a little quiz for you, is to write me five
sentences using the table right here of adverbs and adjectives and try to
use different Tenses. Use positive and
negative statements and questions as well. Alright, you can see the
grading Adverbs on the left starting from a little bit
all the way to extremely. And on the right we've got one-and-a-half columns
of gradeable Adjectives for you to choose. So pause and make
me five sentences. Now. Welcome back. Let's take a look at
some possible answers. Of course, there are
almost an unlimited number of sentences you can make. But we'll take a look
at some good ones. He's a bit irritable today. Alright, so he's not very,
very, very irritable. Just a bit, a bit grumpy. The next €150, that's
a reasonable price. That movie was
pretty frightening. I'm still feeling quite shaken. Quite shaken,
pretty frightening. It's not particularly hot today. Alright, So
particularly, and hot. Matt thought the movie
would be extremely boring, but I actually think
it was quite exciting. And are you very tired? You can leave a
bit earlier today. Now, gradeable Adjectives,
the ones we can grade, those are pretty common, like the majority of
Adjectives are gradeable. But we need to look
in more detail at the ones that
aren't gradeable. So the non credible Adjectives. And we've got three main
types that we can look at. What are non
degradable Adjectives? Those are the Adjectives that can't be graded with an adverb. The first type is what we
call extreme Adjectives. So the sound, the
soundtrack of June, the movie June is phenomenal. So this is one of those
ones where you can't say a bit phenomenal
or kind of phenomenon, it doesn't make sense. It's such a strong feeling already that we can't change it. That series is hilarious. You should check it out. Hilarious means very,
very, very funny. So again, you can't
say a bit hilarious. The same as you
wouldn't say a bit fascinating or a bit amazing. The feeling is very strong, so we don't grade it. The next one is
absolute adjectives, and they, of course,
can't be graded either. So there is boiled water in the kitchen and the exam
was impossible to pass. So these are the things that are either true or they're not true. There's no middle ground, There's no gray
area in the middle. So either the the
water is boiled It's ready or it's not. It can't be a bit boiled. A famous one here
is at pregnant. There's a famous
expression which is, you can't be a bit pregnant or you can't
be half pregnant. You are either pregnant
or you're not pregnant. And that's what absolute
Adjectives are about. Then the final one is
classifying Adjectives and they describe a noun
or a type of noun. So that is a nuclear
power plant. So the adjective
is nuclear and it tells us what kind of
power plant this is. You can't say that is a really, Really nuclear power plant or kind of a nuclear
power plant. It's just describing it. Mercedes Benz is a
German car manufacturer. Again, you can't say
they're pretty German. They're either German
or they're not German. Let's look in more detail
at extreme Adjectives. Now, we're going to try
and make some sentences. But first of all, let's
learn a little rule, an extra rule about
extreme Adjectives. So we know that
extreme Adjectives are those ones with a
very strong meaning. They already have a
really strong meaning. Like fascinating, phenomenal, things like
that, amazing, brilliant. And so we can't make them less. We can't grade them
by saying like fairly brilliant or like
kind of phenomenal. It doesn't make sense,
It's just not right. But what we can do
is use modifiers. And particularly, we
use absolutely and really to give some
extra emphasis, some extra strength to
these extreme Adjectives. So, for example, it is
absolutely freezing tonight. So you're making it
even more emphasized, even stronger that
it's very cold. Wow, that was
really fascinating. This is a very, very
common way of speaking. It's super, well,
It's really common. It's absolutely common to
use this kind of modifier. Have a look at this table. And these are some non-degradable extreme
Adjectives, by the way, if you want to improve
your vocabulary, this is also a great word
list for you to learn. These all have a
very strong meaning. And what I want
you to do is make maybe five sentences using
the modifier of ADA. Absolutely are really
combined with these words. So we'll take a quick look. Amazing, Very good,
Ancient, very old. Awful is very bad. Boiling very hot,
delicious, very tasty. Enormous is very big. Excellence is very good. Exhausted, very tired,
fascinating, very interesting. Freezing, very cold,
Gorgeous, Very good looking. Terrible. Again, very bad. Terrifying, very scary. Now notice terrible is very bad. Terrifying is very scary. And tiny is very small. If any of those words
and new for you, then make sure you add
them to your vocabulary and you learn them because
they're very useful. Try to make me five sentences using the modifier
and those Adjectives. Now, let's take a look
at a few examples. Your phone is really ancient, really ancient, like so-so old. How absolutely terrible
was that joke? Tomorrow is gonna be
absolutely boiling, or you could say
absolutely boiling hot. She's absolutely gorgeous. She's really gorgeous. Simone looks really terrifying
in her Halloween costume.
44. Adverbs Adjectives Part 6: Next, let's talk about
absolute adjectives. So remember, absolute Adjectives
are used by themselves without an adverb because
it doesn't make sense. If we put an adverb
in front of them, we'll see an example
very shortly. So we don't use any kind
of adverb before them. So my friend's dog was run over. He's dead. Run over means hit by a car. Alright, and you can see
that in the little box. So my friend's dog was
run over, he's dead. And then my friend's
dog was run over. He is completely dead. So completely is
our adverb there. Now, think about this. Can a dog be like
a little bit dead or of person be a little bit dead or like reasonably dead, fairly dead kind of
debt or extremely debt. Completely dead. No,
it doesn't make sense. So we don't say he's
completely dead. Just say directly He's dead. It's an absolute adjectives. But something that
we can do with absolute Adjectives is
again, emphasize them. In some situations, we can use
modifiers like absolutely, totally and completely to modify those
absolute adjectives. So can you believe at the
concert is totally free? I'm going to absolutely
destroy you in Call of Duty. Alright, now think
about these statements. So, could a concert
be like a bit three? Could it be like
very, very free? And if something is destroyed, can it be like a bit
destroyed, fairly destroyed? Know, it can. So something is free
or it's not free. It's free or it costs
like maybe $0.01 or $1. And if it's one central
$1, it's not free. So we can't use those
words like kind of fairly partially
things like that. Okay. The same as destroyed. Something is destroyed
or it's not destroyed. Like we can never use it again, or we can still use it. Actually, that's an
interesting thing. If something is like hurt, we would say it's damaged. Like my laptop is damaged. My phone is damaged, but I can still use
it or I can fix it. If you say my laptop
is destroyed, my phone is destroyed. You can never use it again. It's totally gone. So that's why I destroyed
isn't absolute adjectives. So the question is, what are those words are absolutely totally
or completely doing? Again, they're adding emphasis
where they're making the, the strength of
what you're saying even clearer with
the concept is like, Oh my God, it's hard to
believe that it's free. Such an amazing concept.
Wow, it's free. I can't believe it. So then
we can use totally free. And about the talking
to your friend. You're like showing your friend that you really are going
to beat them very badly. Like you're gonna, you're gonna
kick their *** basically. Excuse my language. So again, we can use
the word Absolutely, I'm going to absolutely
destroy you in this game. So remember, when its
absolute adjectives, we can use modifiers. We can't use those
grading Adverbs. We're gonna do a little quiz. And in this quiz I want you to think about something
a little difficult. So what I want you
to do is try to write if four or five sentences using this set of
modifiers and Adjectives. So we've got absolutely,
totally and completely. And we've got acceptable. Dad destroyed, finished free, impossible, necessary,
perfect, ruined, and unacceptable, which are all non-degradable,
absolute adjectives. But when you're doing
it, think about this. Remember the context,
the situation, the background of
each statement. So for example, if you said something is totally
unacceptable, that makes sense that you
are putting the emphasis, you're making it really
strong in what you're saying, your behavior is totally unacceptable or come in,
it's absolutely free. That kind of thing.
You're making the the strength of what
you're saying clear. You're emphasizing it But it doesn't really
make sense if you say Elvis Presley
is totally dead. The dog is totally dead. Because how can it
be less than that? So we have to use our own
judgments in these cases. Think about the logic. It's not so much a question
of remembering grammar rules. It's more what is the logic
of what we're saying? Can we make the
sentence logical? And by thinking
in a logical way, choose whether we should
use these modifiers or not. Anyway, I'll leave that
for you to think about. And I want you to write me
four or five sentences. Pause this video, have a try. Now. Let's take a look at
some possible answers. We have our Starbucks
giving away free coffee. So they're completely free. We don't have to
complete a Review or give you our phone numbers
in exchange for the coffee. So you're checking, is it, is the free really true? Completely free? Is it absolutely necessary for you to speak so
loudly all the time? As a really good my sisters and my friend's sister
wrote off her car. That means like she
she was driving, she crashed it and it's so badly damaged that has to
destroy it completely. Like she can never
drive it again. It's totally ruined. So we're making the strength
of that word ruined even more clear by using
totally, we're adding emphasis. Finally, let's talk about
classifying Adjectives. The third of those type of
adjectives that we looked at. These ones are
useful for grouping nouns of one particular
type together. And that standard Adjectives, you know, these ones you've
already been using one's. They can't be graded. Remember, before we
looked at German, BMW or Mercedes Benz is a
German car manufacturer. They can't be kind of German. So some examples is classical or quantum physics
more interesting? You would never say, Oh, this is fairly quantum. It just wouldn't make sense. My mom bought me a digital
watch for Christmas. And then let me say
something interesting here, which is that sometimes native speakers
break these rules. So take a look at these
two sentences here. And you'll notice that things
which should be classifying Adjectives have the word extremely and the word
vary in front of them. What is the meaning? What is the purpose
of what they're saying here? Can
you figure it out? The first one is that film
was extremely British. Or you could say like
he is very American. Or you could say, it's a
very capitalistic country. So what's the purpose here? What, what are we doing? What does that mean exactly? Because it's breaking
the grammar rule. So first of all, if a film is very British, it's showing that the
humor or the culture or the styles that are like connected or
associated with Britain. British people are
with British films. So it's showing
British stereotypes. It's like much more British
than maybe the reality. Alright, so you could
say someone has a very British
attitude to something. That means that they're
an extreme version of being British. Like that would
be probably they, they're not very good at
saying what they think. And they're not good
at dealing with their emotions and
things like that. Bad food, some would say. Then the other one, if a country is very capitalistic country, it suggests that like
profit is the big priority. Profit is prioritize instead
of people's well-being, instead of looking
after the people. And it's kind of comparing it to other capitalist countries. Some people say that America, and particularly the
healthcare system in America, is extremely capitalistic,
is more focused on profit and making money than about
looking after people. Again, we're like
breaking the rule, but in an acceptable way
to show that something is even more of an extreme
thing than the normal. So the very British is even
more British than British. Very capitalistic is even more capitalistic than other
capitalist countries. So this is not
something that you necessarily need to
start doing yourself, but it's something that
you should be aware of. And next time you hear it, you can, you'll breaking
the grammar rule. But it's acceptable and
I get what you're doing.
45. Adverbs Adjectives Part 7: Let's move on from
talking about the gradeable and
non-degradable Adjectives. And take a look at a
few pairs of words. So first of all, let's look
at just and about two. And many people get a little bit confused between these two. So these are two
very common Adverbs that are talking about time. These are adverbs of time. And they show when something
has happened or will happen. Just means something
happened very recently. Can I call you back in 2 min? I just got home. I very recently got home. I'll see you in half an hour. I've just left the office. So I walked out of
the office 2 min ago. Then about two means something
will happen very soon. So I'm about to get into BED. Can I call you back tomorrow? So in two more minutes, 2 min in the future, I might get into bet he's
about to leave the office. You should talk to him. Now. He's about to leave the office. It means he's still
in the office, but he's like walking to the door and he's
ready to leave, he's ready to finish
work for today. And we could put both of them
in one sentence and say, I just got home and I'm
about to get into bad. Must have been a very long day that you're so tired
that you got home and immediately get into bad without even eating or sitting
down and watching TV. So there you go.
That's how we use both of them in one sentence, another pair of words
that people get confused about already and yet. So already talks about an action that has
happened in the past. And sometimes it can be an action that was
quicker than expected, like it's a little
bit surprising. So you already home. I wanted to ask for a left. So now you are at home. I'm a little bit surprised
because I thought you might be maybe
still in the office, are still at school or
something like that. My apologies, mom. Your flight has already left. So it's not here
anymore. It's gone. And yet is a period of
time between the past and the present moment shows that something hasn't happened,
hasn't happened yet. But we think it's going
to happen in the future. It is expected to
happen in the future. For example, Shawn
isn't here yet, but I'm happy to
help you if I can. So in this situation, we're expecting
Sean, by the way, CAN is pronounced sure
not seen or cyan is Sean. He isn't here yet, but we know that he's coming
sometime in the future, maybe in 10 min, maybe in 2 h. But not yet. Has the plane landed yet? And then we're not sure. Is it still in the air or not? We can say yes, it's
already landed. It's on the ground or
it hasn't landed yet, it's still in the air. And we can put them
both into one sentence. We haven't seen the
new teacher yet, but he's already
given us homework. So he might have
e-mailed homework before the first-class. And one more word that
we should look at and quickly review is
the word still, still talks about an action or event that is
currently happening. So it hasn't finished yet. So are you still working? It's already 11:00 P.M. so
you're still doing your work. Can you still give me a
lift to the gym tomorrow? Now that one means
has the situation changed or is the situation
the same as before? Yes, you can take me in
your car to go to the gym. John Bonham is still the greatest rock
drummer of all time. Jump on them was the
drummer for Led Zeppelin. For anyone who doesn't know. What we're saying is that
even though there's been another like more than
40 years since he died, he is still the best one. That situation hasn't changed. It's still currently true. And my brother's still
hasn't woken up, so he's still sleeping. Now, you might be thinking, but in a master English
grammar course, this is maybe a
little bit too easy. Julie. You might be right. If we were to only look at the words still or
the word already, it might be a little bit easy. But here's what I
want you to do. This is the hard part. Can you choose the right adverb of time for the right situation? So I'm gonna give
you some sentences. You're going to
choose which adverb goes into which place. So we have 12,345.6 and the last one has got three different
Adverbs in there. That's a bit of a challenge. So I want you to
choose for each space. Should we have already yet? Just still or about two? Pause, have a triad,
those ones now. So welcome back.
Let's take a look. Sophia's mom says, hi, I just saw her on my way home. So it happened in
the recent past. That's why we say
just where are you? I'm about to leave. So I haven't left yet. And I'm waiting for you
probably maybe I want to say something to you before I go or we're leaving together, but I am ready. I'm
about to leave. Have you still not
bought the tickets? We might not be able to get seats so close before the movie. Alright, so the time
is getting very long. You could also change
this around to use yet. You might be able
to say, haven't, you bought the tickets yet? But probably the one we've got
here is a bit more common. Have you still not?
Or you might say, you still haven't
bought the tickets. Have you met them? Bosses,
new secretary yet? So there we go. Is
it something that's already happened to you or not? Might I might I be able
to catch a ride with you? No, I'm sorry. I just left or I already left. So in this situation, both of those would
be acceptable. Because it means,
they both mean that the action of
leaving is finished. Just means that it
finished very recently, like a few minutes ago already. It might be recently or
it might be 2 h ago, but we know that
it's finished. Okay. So the difference between
Justin already is just how close it is to now. Just is probably a
few minutes ago. And already is could be any time could be a
short-term or long-term. Finally, did you already tell your manager
about the problem? I'm hoping I can still fix the problem before
anyone finds out, but I'm still not
sure how to do it. The last thing we're going
to talk about in terms of Adverbs and Adjectives
is this table. So what I want you to do, this is an interesting
challenge. I want you to read the
sentence on the left, explain the situation, explain the meaning
of the sentence, as you can see in
green on the right. So for example, tally
is just cooked dinner. That means that Talia
finished cooking dinner a few minutes ago. So I want you to look
at the other four. So we have Talia
already cooked dinner. Talia still hasn't
cooked dinner. Talia hasn't cooked dinner yet. And has Talia cooked yet? I want you to explain, in other words, the
meaning of those four. Pause and have a try. Now, let's take a look. Now. Already cooked Talia
finished cooking dinner. We don't know when. Remember that's the
difference between already and just already as
much more loose, much more flexible in the time. Still hasn't cooked dinner. She hasn't started cooking yet. Hasn't cooked dinner yet. Talia has not started cooking, but we know that she
will start cooking. The feeling, I think still is that wears a
little bit of noise. Like Talia still
hasn't cooked dinner. I'm so hungry. Whereas
the next one tally it hasn't cooked dinner yet, doesn't have such a strong
feeling of being annoyed. It's just describing something. And then has Talia cooked yet? We don't know if Talia has cooked dinner and we
want to find out. Okay. And that's how we
make a question with yet. So that is the end
of our section all about Adverbs and Adjectives. I hope it was useful, has certainly been
a long section. So I hope you've stuck with
me through to the end. And you've answered all
of those quiz questions. As always, if there's anything
you're not sure about, please go back and check or
send me a message to clarify. And I'll be waiting for you with some more videos very soon.